AVR-X4700H - Home Theater DENON - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	AV Receiver
Brand	Denon
Model	AVR-X4700H
Channels	9.2
Amplifier Power	125 W per channel (8 ohms, 20 Hz-20 kHz, 0.05% THD)
HDMI Inputs	7 (including 1 front)
HDMI Outputs	3 (including 1 eARC)
HDMI Version	8K/60Hz and 4K/120Hz pass-through
Surround Sound Support	Dolby Atmos, DTS:X, Auro-3D
Wireless Connectivity	Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, AirPlay 2, HEOS
Dimensions (W x H x D)	17.1 x 6.6 x 14.9 inches (434 x 167 x 378 mm)
Weight	29.1 lbs (13.2 kg)
Power Consumption	740 W (0.1 W standby)
Power Supply	AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Room Calibration	Audyssey MultEQ XT32
Multi-room Audio	Zone 2 and Zone 3 line out
Video Processing	4K/8K upscaling, Dolby Vision, HDR10+
Audio Processing	32-bit / 192 kHz DACs
Maintenance & Cleaning	Use a soft dry cloth; avoid liquids; ensure ventilation
Safety	Do not block vents; keep away from moisture; use grounded outlet
Spare Parts & Repairability	Contact Denon support for authorized service centers

Frequently Asked Questions - AVR-X4700H DENON

How do I set up the Denon AVR-X4700H for the first time?

Connect your speakers, TV, and sources. Use the on-screen setup assistant to configure Audyssey room calibration and network settings.

Can I connect a Bluetooth device to the AVR-X4700H?

Yes, press the Bluetooth button on the remote or front panel to pair. The receiver supports Bluetooth audio streaming.

What is the recommended speaker impedance for this receiver?

Use speakers with impedance between 4 and 16 ohms. Set the appropriate impedance in the setup menu to avoid overheating.

How do I enable Dolby Atmos on the AVR-X4700H?

Connect overhead or upfiring speakers. In the setup menu, assign speaker channels for height speakers, then select a Dolby Atmos source.

Why is there no sound from my subwoofer?

Check the subwoofer cable connection, ensure the subwoofer is powered on, and verify the speaker configuration in the setup menu (set Subwoofer to Yes).

How do I update the firmware on my AVR-X4700H?

Connect the receiver to the internet via Ethernet or Wi-Fi. Go to Setup > General > Firmware Update and select Update Now.

Can I use the receiver with a 4K TV and an 8K source?

Yes, the AVR-X4700H supports 8K/60Hz and 4K/120Hz pass-through. Use certified HDMI 2.1 cables for optimal performance.

What does the HEOS feature allow me to do?

HEOS lets you stream music wirelessly to the receiver and other HEOS-compatible speakers, supporting services like Spotify, Tidal, and more.

How do I reset the receiver to factory settings?

While the unit is on, press and hold the 'Tuner Preset Ch +' and 'Zone 2 On/Off' buttons simultaneously until the display flashes.

My remote control is not working. What should I do?

Replace the batteries with fresh ones. Ensure there are no obstructions between the remote and the receiver. Try resetting the remote by removing batteries for 30 seconds.

USER MANUAL AVR-X4700H DENON

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

DENON®

AVR-X4700H

INTEGRATED NETWORK AV RECEIVER

Owner's Manual

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Accessories 8 Inserting the batteries 9 Operating range of the remote control unit 9

Features 10 High quality sound 10 High performance 13 Easy operation 17

Part names and functions 18 Front panel 18 Display 22 Rear panel 24 Remote control unit 28

Connections

Speaker installation 32
Connecting speakers 40
Before connecting speakers 40
Speaker configuration and "Amp Assign" settings 44
Connecting 5.1-channel speakers 46
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers 47
Connecting 9.1-channel speakers 51
Connecting 11.1-channel speakers 59
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers: Bi-amp connection of front speakers 65
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speakers 66
Connecting multi-zone speakers 67
Connecting an external power amplifier 71

Connecting a TV 72 Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) 73 Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) 74 Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector 75 Connecting a playback device 76 Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) 77 Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player 78 Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K 79 Connecting a video camcorder or game console 80 Connecting a turntable 81 Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port 82 Connecting FM/AM antennas 83 Connecting to a home network (LAN) 85 Wired LAN 85 Wireless LAN 86 Connecting an external control device 87 REMOTE CONTROL jacks 87 TRIGGER OUT jacks 88 Connecting the power cord 89

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

2

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Playback

Basic operation	91
Turning the power on	91
Selecting the input source	91
Adjusting the volume	92
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)	92
Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player	92
Playing a USB memory device	93
Playing files stored on USB memory devices	94
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device	97
Playing music from Bluetooth device	98
Pairing with other Bluetooth devices	100
Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device	101
Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones	102
Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones	103
Reconnecting to a Bluetooth headphones	104
Disconnecting Bluetooth headphones	104

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts	105
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts	106
Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)	107
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)	108
Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)	108
Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)	109
Listening to preset stations	109
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)	110
Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)	111
Cancelling Preset Skip	112
Listening to Internet Radio	113
Listening to Internet Radio	114
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS	115
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS	116

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Getting the HEOS App	119
HEOS Account	120
Playing from streaming music services	121
Listening to the same music in multiple rooms	124
AirPlay function	128
Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad	129
Playing iTunes music with this unit	129
Play a song from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad on multiple synced devices (AirPlay 2)	130
Spotify Connect function	131
Playing Spotify music with this unit	131
Convenience functions	132
Adding to HEOS Favorites	133
Playing back HEOS Favorites	133
Deleting a HEOS Favorites	134
Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)	135
Adjusting the tone (Tone)	136
Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)	137
Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)	138
Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)	139
Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset)	140

Selecting a sound mode	141
Selecting a sound mode	142
Direct playback	143
Pure Direct playback	144
Auto surround playback	144
Description of sound mode types	145
Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal	150
HDMI Control function	156
Setting procedure	156
Smart Menu function	157
Sleep timer function	159
Using the sleep timer	160
Quick select plus function	161
Calling up the settings	162
Changing the settings	163
Panel lock function	164
Disabling all key button operations	164
Disabling all button operations except VOLUME	164
Canceling the Panel lock function	165

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

4

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Remote lock function	166
Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit	166
Enabling the remote sensor function	166
Web control function	167
Controlling the unit from a web control	167
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room)	169
Connecting ZONE	169
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3	175

Settings

Menu map	177
Menu operations	181

Audio	182
Center Level Adjust	182
Subwoofer Level Adjust	182
Bass Sync	183
Surround Parameter	183
Restorer	190
Audio Delay	191
Volume	192
Audyssey®	193
Graphic EQ	196
Video	198
Picture Adjust	198
HDMI Setup	200
Output Settings	205
Component Video Out	209
On Screen Display	209
Screen Saver	210
4K/8K Signal Format	211
HDCP Setup	212
TV Format	213
Inputs	214
Input Assign	214
Source Rename	217
Hide Sources	217
Source Level	218

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

5

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Speakers 219

Audyssey ^® Setup 219

Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey ^® Setup) 221

Error messages 227

Retrieving Audyssey ^® Setup settings 229

Manual Setup 230

Amp Assign 230

Speaker Config. 238

Distances 243

Levels 244

Crossovers 245

Bass 246

Front Speaker 247

2ch Playback 247

Speaker Preset 250

Network 251

Information 251

Connection 251

Wi-Fi Setup 252

Settings 254

Network Control 256

Friendly Name 256

Diagnostics 257

AirPlay 257

HEOS Account 258

You have not signed in 258

You have already signed in 258

General 259

Language 259

ECO 259

Bluetooth Transmitter 263

ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup 264

Zone Rename 266

Quick Select Names 266

Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 267

Front Display 267

Firmware 268

Information 271

Usage Data 273

Save & Load 273

Setup Lock 274

Reset 274

Operating external devices with the remote control unit 275

Registering preset codes 276

Operating devices 279

Initializing registered preset codes 282

Specifying the operating zone with the remote control 282

Resetting the remote control unit 282

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

6

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Tips

Tips	284
Troubleshooting	286
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off	287
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit	288
Display on this unit shows nothing	288
No sound comes out	289
Desired sound does not come out	290
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs	293
No video is shown on the TV	294
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV	296
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal	296
AirPlay cannot be played back	297
USB memory devices cannot be played back	298
Bluetooth cannot be played back	299
The Internet radio cannot be played back	301
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back	302
Various online services cannot be played	303
The HDMI Control function does not work	303
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network	304
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly	305
Update/upgrade error messages	306
Resetting factory settings	307
Resetting network settings	308
Restoring the firmware to the factory defaults	309

Appendix

About HDMI	310
Video conversion function	314
Playing back a USB memory devices	316
Playing back a Bluetooth device	317
Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS	318
Playing back Internet Radio	319
Personal memory plus function	319
Last function memory	319
Explanation of terms	320
Trademark information	330
Specifications	333
Index	339

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

7

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Thank you for purchasing this Denon product.

To ensure proper operation, please read this owner's manual carefully before using the product.

After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.

Accessories

Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.

Quick Start Guide Safety	Instructions Notes on radio Warranty		(for North Americamodel only)	Cable labels
Power cord	FM indoor antenna AM loop antenna		Sound calibrationmicrophone	Sound calibrationmicrophone stand
Remote control unit (RC-1240)	R6P/AA batteries External antennas forBluetooth/wirelessconnectivity

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

8

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Inserting the batteries

1 Slide the rear cover off the remote control unit in the arrow direction.

2 Insert two batteries correctly into the battery compartment as indicated.

3 Put the rear cover back on.

NOTE

• To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
- Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
- Do not use two different types of batteries.
- Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods.
- If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.

Operating range of the remote control unit

Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

9

Features

High quality sound

• Powerful 9-channel Amplifier with the Latest Home Cinema Specs Featuring discrete high-current amplifiers on all channels, this unit delivers high-power performance at 125 watts per channel (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz, T.H.D.: 0.05 %, 2ch. driven) to ensure a dynamic and precise entertainment experience. Low impedance drivers provide operational stability for a wide range of speakers and create a balanced, tonal sound. Upgrade your expectations in home theater entertainment.

• Dolby Atmos (p. 321)

This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos audio format. The placement or movement of sound is accurately reproduced by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling you to experience an incredibly natural and realistic surround sound field.

• Speaker Virtualizer (p. 185)

Speaker Virtualizer enables you to access a more immersive entertainment experience from traditional channel based speaker layouts through digital signal processing including Dolby Atmos height virtualization and surround virtualization.

• Speaker Virtualizer is not for use when both height speakers and surround speakers are connected.
• Height Virtualization may be applied when surround speakers are connected.

• DTS:X (p. 324)
This unit is equipped with the DTS:X decoder technology. DTS:X brings the home theater experience to new heights with its immersive object based audio technology which removes the bounds of channels. The flexibility of objects allows for sound to be scaled large or small and moved around the room with greater accuracy than ever before leading to a richer immersive audio experience.

• DTS Virtual:X (p. 325)

DTS Virtual:X technology features DTS's proprietary virtual height and virtual surround processing to deliver an immersive sound experience from any type of input source (stereo to 7.1.4 channel) and speaker configuration.

- DTS Virtual:X is not for use when Height speakers are connected.

• IMAX Enhanced (p. 325)

This IMAX Enhanced product have met stringent performance standards established by IMAX and DTS in order to create a consistent and higher bar for sound performance. DTS has developed a special method for reproducing an IMAX signature sound experience in the consumer's home. This method combines a unique conversion process for IMAX theatrical audio mixes utilizing an enhanced DTS codec technology. The IMAX theatrical audio format with point source surround speakers closely matches the speaker configuration most consumers have in their homes today. Coupled with DTS audio technology, IMAX Enhanced audio products will ensure the best and most accurate audio reproduction over 5.1 or more speaker channels.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

10

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

- Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment) (p. 195)

Audyssey LFC ^™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFC ^™ dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.

- Discrete subwoofers and Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ (p. 220)

The unit has two subwoofer output capability and can adjust the level and delay for each subwoofer individually.

Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to both subwoofers together for improved deep bass response and detail.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

11

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

• Auro-3D

This unit is equipped with an Auro-3D decoder.

With Auro-3D, Front Height (FHL + FHR), Surround Height (SHL + SHR) and Top Surround (TS/optional) are added to a conventional 5.1-channel system to achieve a natural and realistic sound field that is three-dimensional and fully immersive.

You will be able to fully enjoy Auro-3D playback if you properly place the speakers for Auro-3D.

■ Auro-3D playback

■ Dolby Atmos playback

• Auro-3D does not support a Dolby Atmos configuration using Top Front, Top Middle or Top Rear speakers.
  But it is possible to support both an Auro-3D and Dolby Atmos by adding Front Height and Rear Height speakers* to a 5.1 configuration.
  * For an optimum Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are strongly recommended.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

12

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

High performance

• Ultimate Home Theater Experience – 8K Ready

This unit delivers the ultimate home theater experience with 8K/60Hz pass-through, 4K/120Hz pass-through for gaming, and support for the latest HDMI specifications. This unit allows you to build the best 4K home theater system, and offers the convenience of knowing that the used AV receiver is ready for 8K format whenever the user decides to use it.

Enjoy the highest quality 3D audio and video for even the most demanding entertainment needs.

- HDCP 2.3

This unit is compatible with HDCP 2.3 copyright protection standard.

- Digital video processor upscales SD (resolution) or HD (720p/1080p) / 4K to 8K

graph LR
    A["Remote Device"] -->|8K 8K Up to 1080p/4K 60Hz| B["Amplifier"]
    B -->|8K up scaling| C["8K Ultra HD"]

This unit is equipped with a 8K video upscaling function that allows SD (Standard Definition) or HD (High Definition)/4K 60Hz video to be output via HDMI at 8K (7680 × 4320 pixels) resolution. This function enables the device to be connected to a TV using a single HDMI cable, and produces high definition images for any video source.

• Equipped with HDMI ZONE2 output (p. 169)

The ZONE2 multi-room output includes an HDMI output that lets you enjoy a different A/V source in that room, with another program playing in the main room.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

13

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

- HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV devices (8 inputs, 3 outputs)

graph TD
    A["Device 1"] --> C["Central Device"]
    B["Device 2"] --> C
    D["Device 3"] --> C
    E["Device 4"] --> C
    F["Device 5"] --> C
    G["Device 6"] --> C
    H["Device 7"] --> C
    I["Device 8"] --> C
    J["Device 9"] --> C
    K["Device 10"] --> C
    L["Device 11"] --> C
    M["Device 12"] --> C
    N["Device 13"] --> C
    O["Device 14"] --> C
    P["Device 15"] --> C
    Q["Device 16"] --> C
    R["Device 17"] --> C
    S["Device 18"] --> C
    T["Device 19"] --> C
    U["Device 20"] --> C
    V["Device 21"] --> C
    W["Device 22"] --> C
    X["Device 23"] --> C
    Y["Device 24"] --> C
    Z["Device 25"] --> C
    AA["Device 26"] --> C
    AB["Device 27"] --> C
    AC["Device 28"] --> C
    AD["Device 29"] --> C
    AE["Device 30"] --> C
    AF["Device 31"] --> C
    AG["Device 32"] --> C
    AH["Device 33"] --> C
    AI["Device 34"] --> C
    AJ["Device 35"] --> C
    AK["Device 36"] --> C
    AL["Device 37"] --> C
    AM["Device 38"] --> C
    AN["Device 39"] --> C
    AO["Device 40"] --> C
    AP["Device 41"] --> C
    AQ["Device 42"] --> C
    AR["Device 43"] --> C
    AS["Device 44"] --> C
    AT["Device 45"] --> C
    AU["Device 46"] --> C
    AV["Device 47"] --> C
    AW["Device 48"] --> C
    AX["Device 49"] --> C
    AY["OutIn"]
    AZ["OutIn"]

For connection to a broad range of digital sources, this unit features 8 HDMI inputs, including 1 on the front panel that lets you quickly and conveniently connect a camcorder, game console or other HDMI-equipped device. There are dual HDMI outputs for the main room, and a third HDMI output for another room.

• eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) function compatibility

The eARC function is compatible with conventional ARC function-compatible audio formats in addition to multichannel linear PCM, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS:X and other audio formats a conventional ARC function cannot transmit. Additionally, connecting to an eARC function-compatible television enables enjoyment of higher-quality surround playback of the audio content played from your television.

- The device is equipped with a AirPlay® function in addition to network functions such as Internet radio etc. (Kp. 128)

Illustration of a mobile phone connected to a CD and a radio, with hands interacting with it (no text or symbols present)

You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC.

This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music library from an iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch® or iTunes®.

• Supports AirPlay 2 ^® wireless audio

Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous playback.

This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

14

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

- Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks

This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as DSD (5.6 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality playback of high resolution files.

- Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out easily (p. 97)

You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.

- Connect Bluetooth headphones

This unit can transmit Bluetooth so you can enjoy audio wirelessly through your Bluetooth headphones.

Playback can be performed using connected speakers and Bluetooth headphones simultaneously, or only using Bluetooth headphones.

Two audio equipment setups connected via wireless speakers and headphones (no text or symbols visible)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

15

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

• Multi-Room audio (p. 139)

【MAIN ZONE】

3D diagram of a smart home setup with TV, wall-mounted speakers, and connected devices (no text or symbols visible)

【ZONE2】/【ZONE3】

3D diagram showing a gray sofa with two red-lit towers and a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.

In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same time. This is useful when you want to let the background music propagate throughout the whole house.

• Energy-saving design

This unit is equipped with an ECO Mode function that allows you to enjoy music and movies while reducing the power consumption during use, and also an auto-standby function that automatically turns off the power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce unnecessary power use.

- Compatible with the "Denon 2016 AVR Remote" App* for performing basic operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or Android™ devices (Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)

Along with many new features, the graphics and user interface have been completely overhauled. The new app gives you full control of this unit as well as access to its setup menu for detailed adjustments from your phones or tablets. "Denon 2016 AVR Remote" App also gives you quick access to the receiver's status display, option menus, Denon Blu-ray Disc player control, and online owner's manual for your convenience.

* Download the appropriate "Denon 2016 AVR Remote" App for your iOS or Android devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) network that the iPad, iPhone or Android™ is connected to.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

16

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

• HEOS provides streaming music from your favorite online music sources

HEOS wireless multi-room sound system that enables you to enjoy your favorite music anywhere and everywhere around your home. By utilizing your existing home network and the HEOS App (available for iOS, Android and Amazon devices), you can explore, browse, and play music from your own music library or from many online streaming music services.

When multiple products with HEOS Built-in are connected to the same network, they can be grouped to play the same music on all products simultaneously, or different music can be played on each one.

Easy operation

• "Setup Assistant" provides easy-to-follow setup instructions
  First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network, etc.
  • Easy to use Graphical User Interface
  This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved operability.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

17

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Part names and functions

Front panel

For details, see the next page.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

18

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

① Power operation button (⏻)

Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is located) on/off (standby). (☐ p. 91)

② Power indicator

This is lit as follows according to the power status:

• White: Power on
• Off: Normal standby

• Red:

• When "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On" (1 p. 200)

• When "HDMI Control" is set to "On" (p. 202)
• When "Network Control" is set to "Always On" (p. 256)

③ SOURCE SELECT knob

This selects the input source. (☐ p. 91)

④ Remote control sensor

This receives signals from the remote control unit. (1) p. 9

⑤ Display

This displays various pieces of information. (p. 22)

⑥ MASTER VOLUME knob

This adjusts the volume level. (☐ p. 92)

7 Door

When you are using buttons and/or connectors behind the door, press the bottom of the door to open it. Be careful not to catch your fingers when closing the door.

Hand inserting a card into a device (no text or symbols visible)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

19

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

With the door open

① ZONE2 ON/OFF button

This turns the power of ZONE2 (another room) on/off. (☐ p. 175)

② ZONE2 SOURCE button

This selects the input source for ZONE2. (175)

③ ZONE3 ON/OFF button

This turns the power of ZONE3 (another room) on/off. (☐ p. 175)

④ ZONE3 SOURCE button

This selects the input source for ZONE3. (☐ p. 175)

⑤ STATUS button

Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the display.

⑥ Information button (INFO)

This displays the status information on the TV screen. (p. 272)

⑦ Cursor buttons (△▽◀▷)

These select items.

⑧ OPTION button

This displays the option menu on the TV screen.

⑨ DIMMER button

Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (☐ p. 267)

10 QUICK SELECT buttons

With a single press of any of these buttons, you can call up various settings you've registered to each button such as the input source, volume level and sound mode settings. (☐ p. 161)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

20

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

⑪ AUX-HDMI connector

This is used to connect HDMI output compatible devices such as video camcorders and game consoles. (1-2 p. 80)

⑫ USB port (•)

This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices). (1 p. 82)

13 BACK button

This returns to the previous screen.

⑭ ENTER button

This determines the selection.

15 SETUP button

This displays the menu on the TV screen. (p. 181)

⑯ SETUP MIC jack

This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone. (125 p. 222)

⑰ Headphones jack (PHONES)

This is used to connect headphones.

When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT connectors.

NOTE

- To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using headphones.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

21

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Display

① Input signal indicators

These light according to the audio input mode settings of each input source. (12 p. 216)

② Decoder indicators

These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or DTS decoder is running.

③ Audyssey® indicator

This lights when "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ", "Dynamic Volume" or "Audyssey LFC™" has been set up. (17 p. 193)

4 Tuner reception mode indicators

These light up according to the reception conditions when the input source is set to "Tuner".

TUNED: Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in. STEREO: Lights up when receiving FM stereo broadcasts.

⑤ Monitor output indicator

These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting. When set to "Auto(Dual)", the indicators light according to connection status.

⑥ MULTI ZONE indicator

This lights up when ZONE2 or ZONE3 (another room) power is turned on. (175 p. 175)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

22

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

⑦ Sleep timer indicator

This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (☐ p. 159)

8 MUTE indicator

This blinks while the sound is muted. (p. 92)

⑨ Volume indicator

10 Information display

The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.

⑪ Front speaker indicator

This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.

⑫ Input/output signal channel indicators

The channel for input/output signals is displayed according to the setting configured for "Channel Indicators". (17 p. 268)

• When "Channel Indicators" is set to "Output" (Default) These light when audio signals are being output from the speakers.
• When "Channel Indicators" is set to "Input" These light corresponding to the channels that include the input signals.

When playing HD Audio sources, the EXT indicator lights when a signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front, center, surround, surround back, front height, front wide or LFE channel) is input.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

23

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Rear panel

For details, see the next page.

Front panel D

Rear panel Rel

Index

24

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

① Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors

Used to connect the included external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity when connecting to a network via wireless LAN, or when connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth. (Lp. 86)

① Place the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity evenly over the screw terminal of rear.
② Turn clockwise until the antennas is fully connected.
③ Rotate the antenna upwards for best reception.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

25

② TRIGGER OUT jacks

Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function. (17 p. 88)

③ Digital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO)

Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors.

• "Connection 2: TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (p. 74)
• "Connection 3: TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (p. 75)
• "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (p. 77)
• "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (p. 78)

4 RS-232C connector

Used to connect home automation controller devices fitted with RS-232C connectors. Consult the owner's manual of the home automation controller for more information about serial control of this unit.

Perform the operation below beforehand.

① Turn on the power of this unit.
② Turn off the power of this unit from the external controller.
③ Check that the unit is in the standby mode.

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

⑤ REMOTE CONTROL jacks

Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this unit and external devices from a different room. (☐ p. 87)

6 SIGNAL GND terminal

Used to connect a ground wire for the turntable. (p. 81)

7 NETWORK connector

Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN network. (17 p. 85)

⑧ Video connectors (VIDEO)

Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors.

• "Connection 3: TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (195 p. 75)
• "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (p. 77)
• "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (p. 78)

⑨ HDMI connectors

Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors.

• "Connection 1: TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (t p. 73)
• "Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (1 p. 74)
• "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (p. 77)
• "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (p. 78)
• "Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K" (p. 79)

⑩ AC inlet (AC IN)

Used to connect the power cord. (p. 89)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

26

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

① FM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA)

Used to connect FM antennas and AM loop antennas. (P. 83)

⑫ Analog audio connectors (AUDIO)

Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors.

• "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (1 p. 77)
• "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (p. 78)
• "Connecting a turntable" (1p. 81)

⑬ Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS)

Used to connect speakers. (☐ p. 40)

PRE OUT connectors

Used to connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external power amplifier.

• "Connecting the subwoofer" (p. 41)
• "Connecting 11.1-channel speakers" (p. 59)
• "Connecting an external power amplifier" (p. 71)
• "Connecting ZONE" (p. 169)

⑮ Component video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO)

Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors.

• "Connection 3: TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (1 p. 75)
• "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (p. 78)

NOTE

- Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

27

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Remote control unit

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

28

① AVR operation buttons (AVR CONTROL MAIN, Z2, Z3)

These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated through the remote control unit.

• "Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3" (p. 175)
• "Menu operations" (p. 181)
• "Specifying the operating zone with the remote control" (p. 282)

② Operation mode indicators

The "AVR" operation mode indicator lights when the unit is being operated.

The "DEV." indicator lights when an external device is being operated. The "TV" indicator lights when the TV is being operated.

③ Device operation buttons (DEVICE ⏻ / DEVICE MENU)

These turn the power of external devices on/off and call up menus. Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons. (p. 275)

④ Input source select buttons

These select the input source.

• "Selecting the input source" (p. 91)
• "Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3" (p. 175)

⑤ QUICK SELECT buttons (1 - 4)

These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source, volume level and sound mode settings. (☐ p. 161)

⑥ Channel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE ▲▼)

These select radio stations registered to presets or switch pages. (p. 109)

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

⑦ MUTE button (kHz)

This mutes the output audio.

• "Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)" (p. 92)
• "Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2/ZONE3)" (p. 176)

⑧ Information button (INFO)

This displays the status information on the TV screen. (p. 272)

⑨ Cursor buttons (△▽◀▶)

These select items.

⑩ BACK button

This returns to the previous screen.

⑪ System buttons

These perform playback related operations.

Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, -)

These select either FM broadcast or AM broadcast. (1 p. 106)

⑫ Number / Character buttons

These enter letters or numbers into the unit.

• "Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (p. 106)
- "Operating external devices with the remote control unit" (p. 275)

13 Remote control signal transmitter

This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (p. 9)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

29

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

14 POWER button (⏻)

This turns the power on/off.

• "Turning the power on" (p. 91)
• "Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3" (p. 175)

⑮ TV operation buttons (TV ⏻ / TV MENU / TV INPUT)

These turn the TV power on/off, switch the TV input and call up menus. Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons. (17 p. 280)

⑯ ECO Mode button (")

This switches to ECO Mode. (p. 259)

⑰ VOLUME buttons (▲▼)

These adjust the volume level.

• "Adjusting the volume" (p. 92)
• "Adjusting the volume (ZONE2/ZONE3)" (p. 176)

18 OPTION button

This displays the option menu on the TV screen.

⑲ ENTER button

This determines the selection.

20 SETUP button

This displays the menu on the TV screen. (p. 181)

⑳ SOUND MODE buttons

These select the sound mode. (1-4 p. 141)

22 SLEEP button

This sets the sleep timer. (p. 159)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

30

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Contents

Speaker installation 32

Connecting speakers 40

Connecting a TV 72

Connecting a playback device 76

Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port 82

Connecting FM/AM antennas 83

Connecting to a home network (LAN) 85

Connecting an external control device 87

Connecting the power cord 89

NOTE

• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed. However, when the "Setup Assistant" is running, follow the instructions in the "Setup Assistant" (page 9 in the separate "Quick Start Guide") screen for making connections. (During "Setup Assistant" operation, the input/output connectors do not conduct current.)
• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in noise.

■ Cables used for connections

Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to connect.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

In

31

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Speaker installation

Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room. Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical installation.

graph TD
    A["SLSR"] --> B["FLFR"]
    B --> C["C"]
    D["SBL"] --> E["SW1"]
    F["SB"] --> G["SW2"]
    H["SBR"] --> I["SW2"]

FL/FR(Front speaker left/right):	Place the FRONT left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position. The distance between each speaker and your TV should also be the same.
C(Center speaker):	Place the CENTER speaker in between the front speakers and above or below your TV.
SL/SR(Surround speaker left/right):	Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an equal distance to the left and right sides of the main listening position. If you don't have surround back speakers, move the surround speakers slightly behind your listening position.
SBL/SBR(Surround back speaker left/right):	Place the SURROUND BACK left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position and directly behind the main listening position. When using a single surround back speaker (SB), place it directly behind the listening position.
SW 1/2(Subwoofer):	Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location near the front speakers. If you have two subwoofers, place them asymmetrically across the front of your room.

Front panel Di

Rear panel Re

Index

32

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

graph TD
    RRLRHR --> TRL
    TRL --> TML
    TML --> TFL
    TFL --> FHLFHR
    FHLFHR --> TFR
    TFR --> TMR
    TMR --> TRR
    TRR --> FHLFHR

FHL/FHR(Front height speaker left/right):	Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers directly above the front speakers. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aim them towards the main listening position.
TFL/TFR(Top front speaker left/right):	Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.
TML/TMR(Top middle speaker left/right):	Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers directly above the main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.
TRL/TRR(Top rear speaker left/right):	Mount the TOP REAR left and right speakers on the ceiling slightly behind your main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.
RHL/RHR(Rear height speaker left/right):	Place the REAR HEIGHT left and right speakers directly behind the main listening position. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

33

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

SHL/SHR

(Surround height speaker left/right):

Place the SURROUND HEIGHT left and right speakers directly above the surround speakers.

TS

(Top surround speaker):

Place the TOP SURROUND speaker directly above the main listening position and aligned with the center channel speaker.

- For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

34

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

FDL/FDR(Front Dolby speaker left/right):	Place the FRONT Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on the front speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the front speaker.
SDL/SDR(Surround Dolby speaker left/right):	Place the SURROUND Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on the surround speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker integrated with a surround speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the surround speaker.
BDL/BDR(Back Dolby speaker left/right):	Place the BACK Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on the surround back speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker integrated with a surround back speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the surround back speaker.

About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow the sound to come from over your head by using a special upward-pointing speaker that is placed on the floor.

You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.

Illustration of a person sitting on a couch facing a device emitting light, with no visible text or symbols.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

35

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

• This unit is compatible with Dolby Atmos and DTS:X which offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation.
• The "Speaker Virtualizer" must be set to "On" for Dolby Atmos playback with 5.1-channel speaker configurations or less. (P p. 185)
• IMAX DTS:X / DTS:X can be selected regardless of the speaker configuration.
• Auro-3D recommends adding FRONT HEIGHT and SURROUND HEIGHT speakers to a 5.1 speaker configuration. Optionally, you may substitute REAR HEIGHT, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers instead of FRONT HEIGHT and SURROUND HEIGHT speakers for Dolby Atmos, DTS:X and Auro-3D playback.
• Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.

Top middle / Top surround speaker Surround height speaker

Height speakers layout

- For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

36

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ When 7.1-channel speakers are installed using surround back speakers

■ When 5.1-channel speakers are installed

- When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening position.

Front panel D

Rear panel Rel

Index

37

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Layout including height speakers and ceiling speakers

☐ Height speaker layout example

Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front height/rear height speakers.

☐ Ceiling speaker layout example

Combination of 5.1-channel layout and top front/top rear speakers.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

38

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

☐ Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker layout example

Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front Dolby/surround Dolby speakers.

□ Auro-3D layout example

Combination of 5.1-channel speakers with Front Height/Surround Height/Top Surround speakers.

- For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

39

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting speakers

Here we connect the speakers in the room to this unit.

Before connecting speakers

NOTE

• Disconnect this unit's power plug from the power outlet before connecting the speakers. Also, turn off the subwoofer.
• Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and - sides touch each other. ("Protection circuit" (125 p. 329))
• Never touch the speaker terminals while the power cord is connected. Doing so could result in electric shock. When the "Setup Assistant" (page 9 in the separate "Quick Start Guide") is running, follow the instructions in the "Setup Assistant" screen for making connections. (Power is not supplied to the speaker terminals while the "Setup Assistant" is running.)
• Use speakers with an impedance of 4 – 16 Ω/ohms.

NOTE

- Carry out the following settings when using a speaker with an impedance of 4 – 6 Ω/ohms.

1. Press and hold the main unit's STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same time for at least 3 seconds.
   "*Video Format " appears on the display.
2. Press on the main unit three times.
   "*Sp. Impedance <8ohms>" appears on the display.
3. Use or on the main unit to select the impedance.

8ohms(Default):	Select when the impedance for all of the connected speakers is 8 Ω/ohms or over.
6ohms:	Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 6 Ω/ohms.
4ohms:	Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 4 Ω/ohms.

1. Press the main unit's ENTER to complete the setting.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

40

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Connecting the speaker cables

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and – (black) polarities on the speakers being connected to this unit, and be sure to connect the channels and polarities correctly.

1 Peel off about 3/8 inch (10 mm) of sheathing from the tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it.

2 Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.

3 Insert the speaker cable's core wire to the hilt into the speaker terminal.

4 Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

41

■ Connecting the subwoofer

Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer. Two subwoofers can be connected to this unit.

To use two subwoofers, set "Subwoofer" to "2 spkrs" in the "Speaker Config." setting. (17 p. 238)

The level and distance can be set separately for Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer 2.

graph TD
    A["Device 1"] --> B["Control Panel"]
    C["Device 2"] --> B
    B --> D["Port 1"]
    B --> E["Port 2"]
    B --> F["Port 3"]
    B --> G["Port 4"]
    B --> H["Port 5"]
    B --> I["Port 6"]
    B --> J["Port 7"]
    B --> K["Port 8"]
    B --> L["Port 9"]
    B --> M["Port 10"]
    B --> N["Port 11"]
    B --> O["Port 12"]
    B --> P["Port 13"]
    B --> Q["Port 14"]
    B --> R["Port 15"]
    B --> S["Port 16"]
    B --> T["Port 17"]
    B --> U["Port 18"]
    B --> V["Port 19"]
    B --> W["Port 20"]
    B --> X["Port 21"]
    B --> Y["Port 22"]
    B --> Z["Port 23"]

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

■ About the cable labels (supplied) for channel identification

The channel display section for speaker terminals on the rear panel is color-coded for each channel to be identifiable.

Attach the cable label corresponding to each speaker to each speaker cable.

This makes it easy to connect the correct cable to the speaker terminals on the rear panel.

Speaker Color
FRONT L White
FRONT R
CENTER
SURROUND L Light Blue
SURROUND R Blue
SURROUND BACK L Beige
SURROUND BACK R
FRONT HEIGHT L Light Yellow
FRONT HEIGHT R Yellow
TOP FRONT L Light Yellow
TOP FRONT R Yellow
TOP MIDDLE L Light Purple
TOP MIDDLE R
TOP REAR L Light Purple
TOP REAR R

Speaker Color
SURROUND HEIGHT L	Light Purple
SURROUND HEIGHT R	Purple
REAR HEIGHT L	Light Purple
REAR HEIGHT R	Purple
FRONT DOLBY L	Light Yellow
FRONT DOLBY R Yellow
SURROUND DOLBY L	Light Purple
SURROUND DOLBY R	Purple
BACK DOLBY L	Light Purple
BACK DOLBY R
TOP SURROUND	Black
SUBWOOFER 1	Black
SUBWOOFER 2	Black

42

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Attach the cable label for each channel to its speaker cable as shown in the diagram.

Refer to the table and attach the label to each speaker cable.

Then, make connection so that the color of the speaker terminal matches that of the cable label.

[How to attach the cable labels]
Speaker

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

43

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings

This unit has a built-in 9-channel power amplifier. In addition to the basic 5.1-channel system, a variety of speaker systems can be configured by changing the "Amp Assign" settings to suit the application, such as 7.1-channel systems, bi-amp connections and 2-channel systems for multi-zone playback. (p. 230)

Perform "Amp Assign" settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (p. 230)

Playback speaker in each zone			“Amp Assign” settings	Connection page
MAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONE3
5.1-channel playback	2-channel (Pre-out)	2-channel (Pre-out)	Can be set in all “Amp Assign” modes.	46
7.1-channel playback 7.1ch + ZONE2 (Default) 47
9.1-channel playback 9.1ch 51
11.1-channel playback 11.1ch 59
7.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)			7.1ch (Bi-Amp) 65
Second front speakers 7.1ch + Front B 66
7.1-channel playback 2-channel	(Speaker out)	2-channel (Pre-out)	7.1ch + ZONE2 (Default) 67
7.1-channel playback 2-channel (Pre-out) 2-channel		(Speaker out)	7.1ch + ZONE3 67
5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)	2-channel (Speaker out)	2-channel (Pre-out)	5.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2	68
5.1-channel playback 2-channel	(Speaker out)	2-channel (Speaker out)	5.1ch + ZONE2/3	69
7.1-channel playback 1-channel	(Speaker out)	1-channel (Speaker out)	7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO	70
9.1-channel playback (using this unit as a pre amplifier)	Not used	Not used	Pre Amplifier	71

The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration. The following pages provide basic connection examples.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

44

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Refer to the example connection for "Example connection for the Auro-3D 9.1-channel system" (p. 57) when playing Auro-3D with a 9.1-channel system using the basic 5.1-channel system and the front height and surround height speakers.

Also refer to the connection example for "Example connection for the Auro-3D 10.1-channel system" (12p. 62) when playing Auro-3D with a 10.1-channel system by adding the top surround speaker.

- In addition to the connections described in p. 46 - 70, this unit allows for various speaker connections with the "Amp Assign" setting. Also refer to the menu screen in "View Terminal Config." on the "Amp Assign" setting screen, which shows how to make connections in your environment.

graph TD
    A["Pre-OUT"] --> B["BEARDS"]
    C["FROCT"] --> D["BEARDS"]
    E["REDACT"] --> F["BEARDS"]
    G["Back"] --> H["Back"]

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

45

Remote

Index

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Connecting 5.1-channel speakers

This serves as a basic 5.1-channel surround system.

Front panel D

Rear panel Rel

Index

46

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Connecting 7.1-channel speakers

■ Example connections when using surround back speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround back speakers.

graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FRFL"]
    B --> C["C"]
    C --> D["S"]
    D --> E["R"]
    E --> F["$"]
    F --> G["LSBLSBR"]
    G --> H["Display Unit"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#bbf,stroke:#333

- Set "Floor" to "5ch & SB" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (p. 233)

- When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L terminal.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

47

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

■ Example connections when using ceiling speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with ceiling speakers.

graph TD
    A["Central Device"] --> B["RF Source"]
    A --> C["RF Source"]
    A --> D["RF Source"]
    A --> E["RF Source"]
    A --> F["RF Source"]
    A --> G["RF Source"]
    A --> H["RF Source"]
    A --> I["RF Source"]
    A --> J["RF Source"]
    A --> K["RF Source"]
    A --> L["RF Source"]
    A --> M["RF Source"]
    A --> N["RF Source"]
    A --> O["RF Source"]
    A --> P["RF Source"]
    A --> Q["RF Source"]
    A --> R["RF Source"]
    A --> S["RF Source"]
    A --> T["RF Source"]
    A --> U["RF Source"]
    A --> V["RF Source"]
    A --> W["RF Source"]
    A --> X["RF Source"]
    A --> Y["RF Source"]
    A --> Z["RF Source"]
    A --> AA["RF Source"]
    A --> AB["RF Source"]
    A --> AC["RF Source"]
    A --> AD["RF Source"]
    A --> AE["RF Source"]
    A --> AF["RF Source"]
    A --> AG["RF Source"]
    A --> AH["RF Source"]
    A --> AI["RF Source"]
    A --> AJ["RF Source"]
    A --> AK["RF Source"]
    A --> AL["RF Source"]
    A --> AM["RF Source"]
    A --> AN["RF Source"]
    A --> AO["RF Source"]
    A --> AP["RF Source"]
    A --> AQ["RF Source"]
    A --> AR["RF Source"]
    A --> AS["RF Source"]
    A --> AT["RF Source"]
    A --> AU["RF Source"]
    A --> AV["RF Source"]
    A --> AW["RF Source"]
    A --> AX["RF Source"]
    A --> AY["RF Source"]
    A --> AZ["RF Source"]
    A --> BA["RF Source"]
    A --> BB["RF Source"]
    A --> BC["RF Source"]
    A --> BD["RF Source"]
    A --> BE["RF Source"]
    A --> BF["RF Source"]
    A --> BG["RF Source"]
    A --> BH["RF Source"]
    A --> BI["RF Source"]
    A --> BJ["RF Source"]
    A --> BK["RF Source"]
    A --> BL["RF Source"]
    A --> BM["RF Source"]
    A --> BN["RF Source"]
    A --> BO["RF Source"]
    A --> BP["RF Source"]
    A --> BQ["RF Source"]
    A --> BR["RF Source"]
    A --> BS["RF Source"]
    A --> BT["RF Source"]
    A --> BU["RF Source"]
    A --> BV["RF Source"]
    A --> BW["RF Source"]
    A --> BX["RF Source"]
    A --> BY["RF Source"]
    A --> BZ["RF Source"]
    A --> CA["RF Source"]
    A --> CB["RF Source"]
    A --> CC["RF Source"]
    A --> CD["RF Source"]
    A --> CE["RF Source"]
    A --> CF["RF Source"]
    A --> CG["RF Source"]
    A --> CH["RF Source"]
    A --> CI["RF Source"]
    A --> CJ["RF Source"]
    A --> CK["RF Source"]

• Set "Floor" to "5ch" and "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (1 p. 233)
• The top front or top rear speakers can be connected instead of the top middle speakers. In this case, set the ceiling speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (127 p. 234)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

48

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

■ Example connections when using height speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front height speakers.

graph TD
    A["Device"] --> B["Switch"]
    B --> C["FRFLCSRSL"]
    C --> D["FHRFHL"]
    D --> E["Central Network Interface"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

• Set "Floor" to "5ch" and "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (1 p. 233)
• The rear height speakers can be connected instead of the front height speakers. In this case, set the height speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (p. 234)

Front panel D

Rear panel Rel

Index

49

graph LR
    A["Contents"] --> B["Actions"]
    B --> C["Playback Settings Tips Appendix"]
    C --> D["Appendix"]

■ Example connections when using Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front Dolby speakers.

• Set "Floor" to "5ch" and "Dolby Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (1 p. 233)
• The surround Dolby speakers can be connected instead of the front Dolby speakers. In this case, set the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (p. 234)

50

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting 9.1-channel speakers

This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 9.1-channels at the same time.

You can connect speakers for up to 11-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 10 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.

■ Example connection when using one set of ceiling speakers

- Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (p. 233)

graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FR FL C SR SL"]
    B --> C["SBR SBL"]
    C --> D["TMR"]
    C --> E["TML"]
    D --> F["HEIGHT 1*"]
    E --> F
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

* The top front or top rear speakers can be connected instead of the top middle speakers. In this case, set the ceiling speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (L27 p. 234)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

51

graph LR
    A["Contents"] --> B["Actions"]
    B --> C["Playback Settings"]
    C --> D["Tips Appendix"]
    D --> E["Final Step"]

■ Example connection when using two sets of ceiling speakers

* You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (I p. 58)

- Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (12p. 233)

52

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Example connection when using one set of height speakers

- Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (127 p. 233)

graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FR FL C SR SL"]
    B --> C["SBR SBL"]
    C --> D["FHR FHL"]
    D --> E["HEIGHT 1*"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

* The rear height speakers can be connected instead of the front height speakers. In this case, set the height speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (p. 234)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

53

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

■ Example connection when using two sets of height speakers

graph TD
    A["RHLRHR"] --> B["FHLFHR"]
    B --> C["SLSR"]
    C --> D["FLFR"]
    D --> E["SW"]
    E --> F["C"]
    F --> G["TV"]
    H["Power Supply"] --> I["Power Supply"]
    J["Power Supply"] --> K["Power Supply"]

graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FR FL C SR SL"]
    B --> C["FHR FHL"]
    B --> D["RHR RHL"]
    B --> E["HEIGHT 1*"]
    B --> F["HEIGHT 2*"]

* You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (I p. 58)

- Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (123 p. 233)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

54

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Example connection when using one set of Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

- Set "Height" - "Dolby Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (137 p. 233)

graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FR FL C SR SL"]
    B --> C["SBR SBL"]
    C --> D["FDR FDL"]
    D --> E["HEIGHT 1*"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

* The surround Dolby or back Dolby speakers can be connected instead of the front Dolby speakers. In this case, set the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (12p. 234)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

55

graph LR
    A["Contents"] --> B["Actions"]
    B --> C["Playback Settings"]
    C --> D["Tips Appendix"]
    D --> E["Output"]

■ Example connection when using two sets of Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

graph TD
    A["Device"] --> B["Camera Module"]
    B --> C["FR"]
    B --> D["FL"]
    B --> E["SR"]
    B --> F["SL"]
    B --> G["Speaker"]
    B --> H["Speaker"]
    B --> I["Speaker"]
    B --> J["Speaker"]
    B --> K["Speaker"]
    B --> L["FDR"]
    B --> M["DL"]
    B --> N["SDR"]
    B --> O["SDL"]
    B --> P["HEIGHT 1*"]
    B --> Q["HEIGHT 2*"]

* You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (1 p. 58)

- Set "Height" - "Dolby Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (127 p. 233)

56

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Example connection for the Auro-3D 9.1-channel system

This speaker configuration is optimized for Auro-3D playback.

- Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (12 p. 233) Next, set "Height" - "Layout" to "Front Height & Surr. Height". (12 p. 234)

*1 You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (1 p. 58)
*2 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

In

57

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Channels output from the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 speaker terminals can be changed to the following patterns according to the speaker systems being used.

Set this from "Amp Assign" in the menu. (☐ p. 230)

Combination of height speakers to be used Connected terminals
Number of height/ceiling speakers	Number of Dolby Speakers	Combination pattern HEIGHT1 SPEAKER	HEIGHT2 SPEAKER
2 speakers None		Front Height Front Height -
		Top Front Top Front -
		Top Middle Top Middle -
		Top Rear Top Rear -
		Rear Height Rear Height -
None 2 speakers		Front Dolby Front Dolby -
		Surround Dolby Surround Dolby	-
		Back Dolby	Back Dolby	-
4 speakers None		Front Height & Top Middle	Front Height	Top Middle
		Front Height & Top Rear	Front Height	Top Rear
		Front Height & Rear Height *	Front Height	Rear Height
		Front Height & Surr. Height	Front Height	Surr. Height
		Top Front & Top Rear Top Front	Top Rear
		Top Front & Rear Height	Top Front	Rear Height
		Top Middle & Rear Height	Top Middle	Rear Height
2 speakers	2 speakers	Front Dolby & Top Rear	Front Dolby	Top Rear
		Front Dolby & Rear Height	Front Dolby	Rear Height
		Front Height & Surr. Dolby	Front Height	Surround Dolby
		Top Front & Surr. Dolby	Top Front	Surround Dolby
None	4 speakers	Front Dolby & Surround Dolby	Front Dolby	Surround Dolby

* For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

58

Remote

Index

Contents

ctions

ttings Tips Appendix

Connecting 11.1-channel speakers

This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 11.1-channels at the same time.

You can connect speakers for 11-channels for MAIN ZONE by using an external power amplifier.

■ Example connection when using two sets of ceiling speakers

- Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (17 p. 233)

graph TD
    A["Power amplifier"] --> B["Speaker Module"]
    B --> C["SW"]
    B --> D["FR FL C SR SL"]
    B --> E["TFR TFLSB R SBL"]
    B --> F["HEIGHT 1*"]
    B --> G["HEIGHT 2*"]
    H["TRR TRL"] --> I["Speaker Module"]
    I --> J["Speaker Module"]
    K["TFR TFLSB R SBL"] --> L["Speaker Module"]
    M["HEIGHT 1*"] --> N["Speaker Module"]

* You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (☐ p. 63)

- You can connect the external power amplifier to the Front channel instead of the Height2 channel. Use the "Pre-out" setting in the menu to set the channel connected to the external power amplifier. (17) p. 237

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

59

Remote

Index

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

■ Example connection when using two sets of height speakers

graph TD
    A["RHL"] --> B["FHL"]
    C["SLSR"] --> D["FLFR"]
    E["SBL"] --> F["SW"]
    G["SBR"] --> H["C"]
    I[" "] --> J[" "]
    K[" "] --> L[" "]

- Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (17 p. 233)

graph TD
    A["Power amplifier"] --> B["Speaker 1"]
    A --> C["Speaker 2*"]
    B --> D["Control Module"]
    C --> D
    D --> E["SW"]
    D --> F["FR FL C SR SL"]
    D --> G["SBR SBL"]
    D --> H["FHR FHL"]
    D --> I["HEIGHT 1*"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

* You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (1 p. 63)

- You can connect the external power amplifier to the Front channel instead of the Height2 channel. Use the "Pre-out" setting in the menu to set the channel connected to the external power amplifier. (17 p. 237)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

In

60

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

■ Example connection when using two sets of Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

graph TD
    SDL["SDL$DR"] --> FDL["FDLFDR"]
    SLSR["SLSR"] --> FDL
    SBL["SBL"] --> FDL
    FDL --> SW["FL"]
    SW --> C["C"]
    FR["FR"] --> C
    SBR["SBR"] --> C

- Set "Height" - "Dolby Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (1 p. 233)

graph TD
    A["Power amplifier"] --> B["Stage 1"]
    B --> C["SW"]
    B --> D["FR FL C SR SL"]
    B --> E["SBR SBL"]
    B --> F["FDR FDL"]
    B --> G["HEIGHT 1*"]
    H["HEIGHT 2*"] --> I["SDR SDL"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

* You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (I p. 63)

- You can connect the external power amplifier to the Front channel instead of the Height2 channel. Use the "Pre-out" setting in the menu to set the channel connected to the external power amplifier. (127 p. 237)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

In

61

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Example connection for the Auro-3D 10.1-channel system

This speaker configuration is optimized for Auro-3D playback.

graph TD
    A["TV System"] --> B["SHL$HR"]
    A --> C["FLFR"]
    A --> D["SWS"]
    A --> E["SLSF"]
    A --> F["FHLFHR"]
    A --> G["TS"]
    A --> H["Computer"]

- Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "5ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (1 p. 233) Next, set "Height" - "Layout" to "Front Height & Surr. Height". (1 p. 234)

graph TD
    A["Power amplifier"] --> B["Switch"]
    B --> C["Speaker 1"]
    B --> D["Speaker 2"]
    B --> E["Speaker 3"]
    B --> F["Speaker 4"]
    B --> G["Speaker 5"]
    B --> H["Speaker 6"]
    B --> I["Speaker 7"]
    B --> J["Speaker 8"]
    B --> K["Speaker 9"]
    B --> L["Speaker 10"]
    B --> M["Speaker 11"]
    B --> N["Speaker 12"]
    B --> O["Speaker 13"]
    B --> P["Speaker 14"]
    B --> Q["Speaker 15"]
    B --> R["Speaker 16"]
    B --> S["Speaker 17"]
    B --> T["Speaker 18"]
    B --> U["Speaker 19"]
    B --> V["Speaker 20"]
    B --> W["Speaker 21"]
    B --> X["Speaker 22"]
    B --> Y["Speaker 23"]
    B --> Z["Speaker 24"]
    B --> AA["Speaker 25"]

*1 You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (1 p. 64)
*2 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Front panel D

Rear panel Ref

Index

62

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

The combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels can be changed to the following patterns according to the speaker system being used. Set this from "Amp Assign" in the menu. (p. 230)

Combination of height speakers to be used Connected terminals
Number of height/ceiling speakers	Number of DolbySpeakers	Combination pattern HEIGHT1	SPEAKER HEIGHT2 PRE OUT
2 speakers None		Front Height Front Height -
		Top Front Top Front -
		Top Middle Top Middle -
		Top Rear Top Rear -
		Rear Height Rear Height -
4 speakers None		Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle
		Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear
		Front Height & Rear Height *	Front Height	Rear Height
		Front Height & Surr. Height	Front Height	Surr. Height
		Top Front & Top Rear	Top Front	Top Rear
		Top Front & Rear Height	Top Front	Rear Height
		Top Middle & Rear Height	Top Middle	Rear Height
None 2 speakers		Front Dolby	Front Dolby	-
		Surround Dolby	Surround Dolby	-
		Back Dolby Back Dolby	-
2 speakers	2 speakers	Front Dolby & Top Rear	Front Dolby	Top Rear
		Front Dolby & Rear Height	Front Dolby Rear Height
		Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height	Surround Dolby
		Front Height & Back Dolby	Front Height	Back Dolby
		Top Front & Surround Dolby	Top Front	Surround Dolby
		Top Front & Back Dolby	Top Front	Back Dolby
None 4 speakers		Front Dolby & Surround Dolby	Front Dolby	Surround Dolby
		Front Dolby & Back Dolby	Front Dolby	Back Dolby

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

63

Remote

Index

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Combination of height speakers to be used Connected terminals
Number of height/ceiling speakers	Number of Dolby Speakers	Combination pattern HEIGHT1	SPEAKER HEIGHT2	PRE OUT	SUBWOOFER2 PRE OUT
5 speakers None		Front Height & Surr. Height & Top Surround	Front Height Surround	Height Top Surround
		Front Height & Rear Height & Top Surround*	Front Height Rear	Height Top Surround

* For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

y Rear panel Re

Index

64

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting 7.1-channel speakers: Bi-amp connection of front speakers

This system plays back 7.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer terminal of a speaker that supports bi-amplification. This connection enables back EMF (power returned without being output) from the woofer to flow into the tweeter without affecting the sound quality, producing a higher sound quality. You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.

NOTE

- When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the speaker's woofer and tweeter terminals.

graph TD
    A["Central Device"] --> B["C"]
    A --> C["S"]
    A --> D["R"]
    A --> E["SBRS"]
    A --> F["BL"]
    A --> G["FHRFHL"]
    A --> H["*"]
    B --> I["(R)"]
    C --> I
    D --> J["(L)"]
    E --> K["FR"]
    F --> L["FL"]
    G --> M["⊕"]
    H --> N["⊕"]

* The height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (Kp. 234)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

65

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting 7.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speakers

This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B as desired.

You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.

graph TD
    A["Switch"] --> B["A"]
    A --> C["A"]
    A --> D["C"]
    A --> E["S"]
    A --> F["R"]
    A --> G["SBR$BL"]
    A --> H["FHR*HLFR*"]
    A --> I["FR(B)"]
    A --> J["FL(B)"]

* The height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (eP p. 234)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

66

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting multi-zone speakers

■ 7.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2 or ZONE3)

This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2.

(Speakers can output audio from ZONE3 instead of ZONE2 (Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE3)).

You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.

graph TD
    A["Device"] --> B["FRFLCSRSL"]
    A --> C["SBRSBL"]
    A --> D["FHRFHL"]
    B --> E["ZONE2 R"]
    C --> F["ZONE2 L"]
    D --> G["ZONE2 R"]
    D --> H["ZONE2 L"]

* The height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (KFP p. 234)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

67

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

■ 5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers: MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2)

This type of configuration plays back 5.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers in MAIN ZONE.

graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["C"]
    A --> C["S"]
    A --> D["R"]
    A --> E["S"]
    A --> F["L"]
    B --> G["RF"]
    C --> G
    D --> G
    E --> G
    F --> G
    G --> H["FL"]
    H --> I["ZONE2 L"]
    H --> J["ZONE2 R"]
    H --> K["ZONE2 S"]
    H --> L["ZONE2 T"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

68

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

■ 5.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2) + 2-channel playback (ZONE3)

This type of configuration plays back 5.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FRFLCSRSL"]
    B --> C["ZONE3 R"]
    B --> D["ZONE3 L"]
    C --> E["ZONE2 R"]
    D --> F["ZONE2 L"]

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

69

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

■ 7.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 1-channel playback (ZONE2) + 1-channel playback (ZONE3)

This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 1-channel (monaural) in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.

graph TD
    A["SW"] --> B["FRFLCSRSL"]
    A --> C["SBRSBL"]
    A --> D["FHRFHL"]
    B --> E["ZONE3 Mono"]
    C --> F["ZONE2 Mono"]
    D --> G["ZONE3 Mono"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

* The height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (p. 234)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

70

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting an external power amplifier

You can use this unit as a pre-amp by connecting an external power amplifier to the PRE OUT connectors. By adding a power amplifier to each channel, the realness of the sound can be further enhanced.

Select the terminal to use and connect the device.

graph TD
    A["Subwoofer (Primary) — AUDIO — SUB-WOOFER 1"] --> B["Power amplifier"]
    C["Subwoofer (Secondary) — AUDIO — SUB-WOOFER 2"] --> D["Power amplifier"]
    B --> E["FRONT CENTER"]
    B --> F["HEIGHT2HEIGHT1"]
    B --> G["SURROUND BACK"]
    B --> H["SUBROUND BACK"]
    B --> I["Ground"]
    D --> J["Ground"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

- Set "Assign Mode" to "Pre Amplifier" if connecting all channels to the Pre-out connectors using an external amplifier. (1 p. 232)

This stops operation of the internal power amplifier of this unit, reducing interference in the pre amplifier created by the power amplifier.

- When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (L) terminal.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

71

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Connecting a TV

Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit.

How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV.

ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.

graph TD
    A["Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector?"] --> B{Yes}
    B --> C["Is the TV compatible with the ARC / eARC?"]
    C --> D{Yes No}
    C --> E{No}

"Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (p. 73)
"Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (17 p. 74)
"Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (p. 75)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

72

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)

Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC / eARC function to this unit.

Set "HDMI Control" to "On" or "ARC" to "On" when using a TV that supports the ARC function. (p. 202)

Using an eARC function-compatible television enables audio playback from the speaker connected to this unit, regardless of "HDMI Control" and "ARC" settings in the menu.

• When using the ARC / eARC function, connect to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector.
• eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this setting exists on your television. For more information, check your television's owner's manual.
• When an ARC and eARC function-compatible television is connected, the eARC function is prioritized.
• Use a "High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet" when using an ARC / eARC function-compatible television.
• Use an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable" to enjoy 8K video.
• Set "4K/8K Signal Format" to "8K Enhanced" in the menu to enjoy 8K video. (p. 211)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

73

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)

Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit.

To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

74

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector

Use a component video or a video cable to connect the TV to this unit.

To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

75

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Connecting a playback device

This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors (HDMI, digital audio and audio).

Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect.

If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections.

In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.

• "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (p. 77)
• "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (p. 78)
• "Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K" (p. 79)
• "Connecting a video camcorder or game console" (12p. 80)
• "Connecting a turntable" (p. 81)

• Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
• The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See "Input Assign" on how to change the input source assigned to the input connectors. (17 p. 214)
• To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" to "TV". (1 p. 200)
  • To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

76

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)

This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example.

Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

77

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player

This explanation uses the connection with a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player as an example.

Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

graph TD
    subgraph "(HDMI incompatible device)"
        A1["Blu-ray Disc player"] --> B1["VIDEO OUT"]
        A2["AUDIO VIDEO"] --> B2["AUDIO OUT"]
        A3["AVIO"] --> B3["H L"]
    end
    subgraph "(HDMI incompatible device)"
        C1["DVD player"] --> D1["AUDIO COAXIAL OUT"]
        C2["VIDEO"] --> D2["AUDIO OUT"]
        C3["VIDEO"] --> D3["COMPONENT VIDEO OUT"]
        C4["AVIO"] --> D4["H L"]
        C5["VIDEO"] --> D5["Y HB PR"]
    end
    subgraph "DVD player"
        E1["Blu-ray Disc player"] --> F1["HDMI OUT"]
        E2["DVD player"] --> G1["HDMI OUT"]
    end
    B1 --> H1["OR"]
    B2 --> H2["OR"]
    B3 --> H3["OR"]
    B4 --> H4["OR"]
    B5 --> H5["OR"]
    B6 --> H6["OR"]
    B7 --> H7["OR"]
    B8 --> H8["OR"]
    B9 --> H9["OR"]
    B10 --> H10["OR"]
    B11 --> H11["OR"]
    B12 --> H12["OR"]
    B13 --> H13["OR"]
    B14 --> H14["OR"]
    B15 --> H15["OR"]
    B16 --> H16["OR"]
    B17 --> H17["OR"]
    B18 --> H18["OR"]
    B19 --> H19["OR"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

78

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K

This unit supports 8K HDMI video signals.

If your player supports 8K, connect it to the HDMI 7 (8K) connector on your device.

• To enjoy 8K video, connect an 8K-compatible TV with an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable".
• Set "4K/8K Signal Format" to "8K Enhanced" in the menu to enjoy 8K video. (p. 211)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

79

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting a video camcorder or game console

This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example. Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

80

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting a turntable

This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.

If you set this unit's input source to "Phono" and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise from the speakers.

NOTE

- The earth terminal (SIGNAL GND) of this unit is not for safety grounding purposes. If this terminal is connected when there is a lot of noise, the noise can be reduced. Note that depending on the turntable, connecting the ground line may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

81

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port

For operating instructions see "Playing a USB memory device" (p. 93).

- Denon does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter, use that device's supplied AC adapter.

NOTE

• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
• It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit's USB port to a PC via a USB cable.
• Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

82

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting FM/AM antennas

Connect the antenna, tune in to a broadcast and then move the antenna to the location where there is least noise. Then use tape, etc. to fix the antenna in this location. ("Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (1 p. 105))

- If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.

NOTE

- Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

83

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

■ Using the AM loop antenna

Suspending on a wall

Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.

Nail, tack, etc.

Standing alone

Use the procedure shown above to assemble.

When assembling, refer to "AM loop antenna assembly".

■ AM loop antenna assembly

1 Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop antenna from the rear and bend it forward.
2 Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the stand.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

84

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting to a home network (LAN)

This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN.

You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various types of playback and operations as described below.

• Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media server(s)
• Playback of streaming music services
  • Using the Apple AirPlay function
  • Operation on this unit via the network
  • Operation with the HEOS wireless multi-room sound system
• Firmware Update

For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer shop.

Wired LAN

To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the router to this unit as shown in the figure below.

graph TD
    A["Internet"] -->|To WAN side| B["Modem"]
    B --> C["PC"]
    C --> D["NAS (Network Attached Storage)"]
    D --> E["LAN port / Ethernet connector"]
    E --> F["LAN port / Ethernet connector"]
    F --> G["Router"]
    G --> H["To LAN port"]
    H --> I["To LAN port"]
    I --> J["To WAN side"]
    J --> K["Modem"]
    K --> L["PC"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

85

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

Wireless LAN

When connecting to the network via wireless LAN, connect the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity connection to the rear panel and stand them upright.

See "Wi-Fi Setup" on how to connect to a wireless LAN router. (K) p. 252

- When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions:

• Built-in DHCP server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
- Built-in 100BASE-TX switch When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
- Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
- The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended. If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be affected by noise.
- When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the IP address, etc. in "Network". (1 p. 251)

NOTE

• The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a computer shop for details.
• This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if your contracted line is not set using PPPoE.
• Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet connector on your computer.
• Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

86

Contents

Connections

yback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting an external control device

REMOTE CONTROL jacks

When this unit is installed in a location where the remote control signals cannot reach (installation in a cabinet etc.), it can still be controlled by the remote control by connecting a remote control receiver unit (sold separately).

You can also use it to remotely control ZONE2 and ZONE3 (another rooms).

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

87

Contents

ctions

ettings Tips Appendix

TRIGGER OUT jacks

When a device with TRIGGER IN jack is connected, the connected device's power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit. The TRIGGER OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V DC/150 mA electrical signal.

NOTE

• Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the TRIGGER OUT jacks. Do not use a stereo mini-plug cable.
• If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V DC/150 mA, or has shorted, the TRIGGER OUT jack cannot be used. In this case, turn off the power to the unit, and disconnect it.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

88

Contents

Connections

ayback Settings Tips Appendix

Connecting the power cord

After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.

To household power outlet (AC 120 V, 60 Hz)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

89

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Contents

Basic operation

Turning the power on 91

Selecting the input source 91

Adjusting the volume 92

Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 92

Selecting a sound mode 141

Playback a device

Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 92

Playing a USB memory device 93

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device 97

Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones 102

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 105

Playback network audio/service

Listening to Internet Radio 113

Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS 115

Getting the HEOS App 119

AirPlay function 128

Spotify Connect function 131

Convenience functions

Convenience functions 132
HDMI Control function 156
Smart Menu function	157
Sleep timer function 159
Quick select plus function	161
Panel lock function	164
Remote lock function	166

Other functions

Web control function	167
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room)	169

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

90

Remote

Index

graph LR
    A["Contents"] --> B["Connections"]
    B --> C["Playback"]
    C --> D["Settings"]
    D --> E["Tips"]
    E --> F["Appendix"]

Basic operation

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

91

Remote

Index

Turning the power on

1 Press POWER ⏻ to turn on power to the unit.

• You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to turn on the power.
• You can also switch the power to standby by pressing ⏻ on the main unit.

Selecting the input source

1 Press the input source select button to be played back. The desired input source can be selected directly.

- You can also select the input source by turning SOURCE SELECT on the main unit.

Adjusting the volume

1 Use VOLUME ▲▼ to adjust the volume.

• The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting.
• You can also adjust the master volume by turning MASTER VOLUME on the main unit.

Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)

1 Press MUTE 📄X.

• MUTE indicator on the display flashes.
  • 📄X appears on the TV screen.

- The sound is reduced to the level set at "Mute Level" in the menu. (19 p. 192)

- To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE 📄X again.

- If ☒ is displayed on the TV screen for more than 5 minutes when the "Screen Saver" is set to "On", the ☒ symbol moves randomly over the TV screen. (p. 210) (This feature will be supported via firmware update.)

Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player

The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player.

1 Prepare for playback.

① Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player.
② Change the TV input to the input of this unit.

2 Press POWER ⏻ to turn on power to the unit.
3 Press DVD or Blu-ray to switch an input source for a player used for playback.
4 Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.

■ Surround playback (p. 141)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

92

graph LR
    A["Contents"] --> B["Connections"]
    B --> C["Playback"]
    C --> D["Settings"]
    D --> E["Tips"]
    E --> F["Appendix"]

Playing a USB memory device

• Playing back music files stored on a USB memory device.
• Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards can be played on this unit.
• This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in "FAT32" or "NTFS" format.
• The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for playback are as follows.
  See "Playing back a USB memory devices" (☐ p. 316) for details.
• WMA
• MP3
• WAV
• MPEG-4 AAC
• FLAC
• Apple Lossless
  • DSD

Contents

Connections

pack

Appendix

Playing files stored on USB memory devices

1 Insert a "FAT32" or "NTFS" formatted USB memory device into the USB port.
2 Press USB to switch the input source to "USB".
3 Select the name of this unit.

4 Browse the music on your USB memory device and select something to play.

- When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now:	Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Now & Replace Queue:	Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Next:	Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.

Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

94

Contents Connections

Setti

5 Use △▽ to select the "Play Now" or "Play Now & Replace Queue", then press ENTER.

Playback starts.

Operation buttons	Function
▶	Playback
■	Pause
■	Stop
I◀◀▶▶I	Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
CH/PAGE ▲▼	Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

- When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while playing the file.

NOTE

• Note that Denon will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device.
• When a USB memory device is connected to this unit, the unit loads all of the files on the USB memory device. Loading may take a while if the USB memory device contains a large number of folders and/or files.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

95

Contents Connections

Setti

■ Operations accessible through the option menu

• "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (p. 135)
• "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (☐ p. 136)
• "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (p. 137)
• "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (p. 139)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

96

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device

Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting this unit with the Bluetooth device.

Communication is possible up to a range of about 98.4 ft/30 m.

NOTE

- To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to support the A2DP profile.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

97

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Playing music from Bluetooth device

In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth device must first be paired with this unit.

Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired again.

1 Prepare for playback.

① Connect the supplied external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity to the Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors on the rear panel. (12 p. 25)
② Press POWER ⏻ to turn on power to the unit.

2 Press Bluetooth.

When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode automatically and "Pairing..." will appear on the display of the unit.

3 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.

4 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device.

Connect to the Bluetooth device while "Pairing" is being displayed on the display of the unit.

Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit (about 3.3 ft/1 m).

5 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.

• The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote control of this unit.
• The next time the Bluetooth button is pressed on the remote control unit, this unit automatically connects to the last Bluetooth device that was connected.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

98

Contents Connections

Setti

Operation buttons Function

	Playback
II	Pause
■	Stop
I◀◀▶▶	Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

- Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title name, Artist name, Album name, etc.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

99

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Pairing with other Bluetooth devices

Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit.

1 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.
2 Press and hold Bluetooth on the remote control unit for at least 3 seconds.
This unit will go into the pairing mode.

3 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device.

• This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered device.
• You can also enter pairing mode by pressing the OPTION button when the Bluetooth playback screen is displayed and selecting "Pairing Mode" from the displayed option menu.

NOTE

• To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth device needs to support the AVRCP profile.
• The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices.
• Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.

■ Operations accessible through the option menu

• "Pairing with other Bluetooth devices" (p. 100)
• "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (15 p. 135)
• "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (12 p. 136)
• "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (p. 137)
• "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (p. 139)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

100

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device

After pairing is completed, the Bluetooth device can be connected without performing any operations on this unit.

This operation also needs to be performed when switching the Bluetooth device for playback.

1 If a Bluetooth device is currently connected, deactivate the Bluetooth setting of that device to disconnect it.
2 Activate the Bluetooth setting of the Bluetooth device to be connected.
3 Select this unit from the Bluetooth device list on your Bluetooth device.
4 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.

• The screen automatically switches to the "Bluetooth" playback screen if a Bluetooth device is connected while the power of this unit is on.
• When the "Network Control" setting of this unit is set to "Always On" and a Bluetooth device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the unit will be turned on automatically. (127 p. 256)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

101

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones

You can listen to audio playing through the MAIN ZONE of this unit on Bluetooth headphones.

Output audio from connected speakers and Bluetooth headphones simultaneously, or only using Bluetooth headphones.

Illustration of a CD-ROM connected to two speakers and an earphone, with sound waves shown below (no text or symbols)

(Output Mode: Bluetooth + Speakers)

Diagram showing a CD-ROM connected to two speakers and an earphone with signal waves (no text or symbols)

(Output Mode: Bluetooth Only)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

102

Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones

1 Set "Transmitter" to "On" from the "General" - "Bluetooth Transmitter" setting in the menu. (p. 263)
2 Select "Output Mode", and set audio output method.

Bluetooth + Speakers(Default):	Audio is output to Bluetoothheadphones and main zone speakers.This simultaneous output is suitable forfamily movie night and other groupactivities.
Bluetooth Only:	Audio is output to Bluetoothheadphones only.This is suitable for listening to music orwatching movies by yourself at nightwhen you need to keep quiet.

3 Enter pairing mode on the Bluetooth headphones you want to connect to this unit.
4 Select "Device List" and select the name of the Bluetooth headphones from the device list.
5 Adjust the volume of connected Bluetooth headphones after the connection is completed.

• "Output Mode" can also be set from "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the option menu.
• A2DP profile-compatible Bluetooth speakers can be connected following the same steps used to connect Bluetooth headphones.

NOTE

• Bluetooth headphones volume cannot be adjusted from this unit. Adjust volume of your Bluetooth headphones.
• Stereo mode is fixed as the sound mode when using Bluetooth headphones. Any sound modes and other audio settings are not reflected in audio output on Bluetooth headphones.
  Audio settings, sound modes and All Zone Stereo mode are not available while using Bluetooth headphones and "Output Mode" is set to "Bluetooth Only".
  • Audio may be delayed when sent over Bluetooth.
• Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected when use a Bluetooth input source in any zone.
  Furthermore, selecting a Bluetooth input source in any zone will terminate the connection between this unit and Bluetooth headphones.
• Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected when this unit is grouped in the HEOS App.

CAUTION:

Using Bluetooth headphones without a volume adjustment function

• In order to avoid hearing loss, do not connect Bluetooth headphones that lack volume adjustment functionality.
• Bluetooth headphone volume may be unexpectedly loud when this unit connects to Bluetooth headphones.
• Bluetooth headphone volume cannot be adjusted from this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

103

Reconnecting to a Bluetooth headphones

Follow any of the steps below to reconnect the most recently used Bluetooth headphones:

• Reconnect to this unit with Bluetooth headphone's reconnect function.
• Go to "Bluetooth Transmitter" and then select "Reconnect" within the options menu.
• If "Output Mode" is set to "Bluetooth + Speakers", this unit will automatically connect to the most recently used Bluetooth headphones when power is turned on.
• Select the device you wish to connect from the "Device List" under "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the menu.

Disconnecting Bluetooth headphones

Complete any of the following steps to disconnect your Bluetooth headphones:

• Turn off your Bluetooth headphones.
• Go to "Bluetooth Transmitter" and then select "Disconnect" within the options menu.
• In the setup menu, go to "General" - "Bluetooth Transmitter", and set "Transmitter" to Off. (1 p. 263)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

104

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

You can use the built-in tuner of this unit to listen to FM broadcasts and AM broadcasts.

Make sure the FM antenna and AM loop antenna are connected to this unit first.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

105

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

1 Connect the antenna. ("Connecting FM/AM antennas" (p. 83))
2 Press TUNER to switch the input source to "Tuner".

[TV screen]

【Display of this unit】

3 Press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

4 Use to select “FM/AM”, then press ENTER.

This displays the reception band input screen.

5 Use ◀▷ to select "FM" or "AM", then press ENTER.

FM: When listening to an FM broadcast.

AM: When listening to an AM broadcast.

6 Press TUNE + or TUNE – to select the station you want listen to.

Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.

- The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of "Auto" mode that automatically searches available broadcast stations and "Manual" mode that lets you tune in using buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is "Auto". You can also use "Direct Tune" to tune in by entering the frequency directly. In "Auto" mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good. If this is the case, then use the "Manual" mode or "Direct Tune" mode to tune in.

Operation buttons Function
TUNE +, – Selects the radio station (up/down)

CH/PAGE ▲▼	Selects preset radio stations
△▽	Selects the radio station (up/down)
◀▷	Selects preset radio stations
0 - 9	Preset channel selection /Direct frequency tuning

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

106

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Operations accessible through the option menu

• "Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)" (p. 107)
• "Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)" (p. 108)
• “Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)” (p. 108)
• "Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)" (109)
• "Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)" (p. 110)
• "Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)" (12p. 111)
• "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (p. 135)
• "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (p. 136)
• "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (p. 137)
• "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (p. 139)

Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)

You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select “Direct Tune”, then press ENTER. The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.
3 Use or 0 - 9 to select a number and press ▷. • If is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
4 Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio station you want to hear.
5 When setting is completed, press ENTER. The preset frequency is tuned in.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

107

Contents Connections

Setti

Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)

You can change the mode for tuning into FM and AM broadcasts. If you cannot tune in automatically with "Auto" mode, change the mode to "Manual" and tune in manually.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select “Tune Mode”, then press ENTER.
3 Use ◀▷ to select the tune mode, then press ENTER.

Auto:	Automatically search for and tune to a receivable radio station.
Manual:	Manually change the frequency one step at a time each time the button is pressed.

Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)

A maximum of 56 radio stations can be automatically preset.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select “Auto Preset Memory”, then press ENTER.
3 Press ENTER.
The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset them.
- When presetting is completed, "Completed" is displayed for about 5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.

- The preset memory is overwritten.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

108

Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)

Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily.

Up to 56 stations can be preset.

1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset. ("Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (p. 106))
2 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
3 Use to select “Preset Memory”, then press ENTER. The list of already preset channels is displayed.
4 Use or 0 - 9 to select the channel you want to preset, then press ENTER.

The current broadcast station that is preset.

- To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.

Channel Default settings
1 – 8	92.10 / 92.30 / 92.50 / 92.70 / 93.10 / 93.50 / 93.70 / 94.10 MHz
9 – 16	94.30 / 94.50 / 94.70 / 94.90 / 95.10 / 95.30 / 95.50 / 95.70 MHz
17 – 24	98.10 / 98.30 / 98.50 / 98.70 / 98.90 / 99.10 / 100.10 / 100.30 MHz
25 – 32	100.50 / 100.70 / 100.90 / 101.10 / 101.30 / 101.50 / 101.70 / 101.90 MHz
33 – 40	103.10 / 103.30 / 103.50 / 103.70 / 103.90 / 104.10 / 104.30 / 104.50 MHz
41 – 48	104.70 / 104.90 / 105.10 / 105.30 / 105.50 / 105.70 / 105.90 / 106.10 MHz
49 – 56	106.30 / 106.50 / 106.70 / 106.90 / 107.10 / 107.30 / 107.50 / 107.90 MHz

Listening to preset stations

1 Use CH/PAGE ▲▼ or 0 - 9 to select the desired preset channel.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

109

Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)

You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it. Up to 8 characters can be input.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select “Preset Name”, then press ENTER. The “Preset Name” screen is displayed.
3 Use ◀▷ to select the group of the broadcast station you want to name.
4 Use to select the broadcast station you want to name, then press ENTER.

5 Use to select a name label, then press ENTER.

The screen that lets you edit the Preset Name is displayed.

- If you select "Set Defaults", then the unit returns to displaying the frequency.

6 Enter the characters, then press "OK".

7 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

110

Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)

Perform auto preset memory to save all the broadcasting stations that can be received in the memory. Selecting a broadcast station becomes easier by skipping unnecessary memories.

1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner".

The option menu screen is displayed.

2 Use to select “Preset Skip”, then press ENTER.

The "Preset Skip" screen is displayed.

3 □ To set the stations you want to skip by groups

① Use ◀ ▷ to select the group of broadcast stations you want to skip.
② Press to select “Set No.* - * to Skip”, then press ENTER. Skip all the broadcast stations that are included in the selected group “*-*”.
(* is the selected group number.)

☐ To set the stations you want to skip by stations

① Use ◀▷ to select the group of broadcast stations you want to skip.
② Use to select the broadcast station you want to skip.
③ Use ◀ ▷ to select "Skip".
The station you selected is not displayed.

4 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

111

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Cancelling Preset Skip

1 While the "Preset Skip" screen is displayed, use ◀ to select a group containing a broadcast station to cancel the skip for.
2 Use to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip for.
3 Use ◀▷ to select "On". The skip is cancelled.

NOTE

- "Preset Skip" cannot be cancelled for groups.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

112

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to Internet Radio

• Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet. Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.
• The Internet Radio station list on this unit the database service provided by TuneIn Radio service.
• The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for playback are as follows.
  See "Playing back Internet Radio" (p. 319) for details.

• WMA
- MP3
- MPEG-4 AAC

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

113

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Listening to Internet Radio

1 Press INTERNET RADIO.

- You can also press "H" (HEOS Music). Use to select "Tuneln Internet Radio", then press ENTER.

2 Select the station you want to play.

Operation buttons Function
▶	Playback
■*	Pause
■	Stop
|◀◀▶▶|*	Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
CH/PAGE ▲▼	Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

* Enabled when playing Podcasts.

- The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the main unit's STATUS is pressed.

NOTE

- The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable without notice.

■ Operations accessible through the option menu

• "Adding to HEOS Favorites" (p. 133)
• "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (125 p. 135)
• "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (p. 136)
• "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (p. 137)
• "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (p. 139)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

114

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS

• This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) from DLNA compatible servers including PCs and NAS devices on your network.
• Supported file formats: For details, see "Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS" (p. 318).

• WMA
• MP3
• WAV
- MPEG-4 AAC
- FLAC
- Apple Lossless
• DSD

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

115

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS

Use this procedure to play music files or playlists stored on DLNA files servers on your local network.

1 Press (HEOS Music).
2 Use to select “Music Servers”, then press ENTER.

3 Select the name of your networked PC or NAS (Network Attached Storage) server.

4 Browse the music on your PC/NAS and select something to play.

- When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now:	Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Now & Replace Queue:	Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Next:	Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.

Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

116

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

5 Use △▽ to select the "Play Now" or "Play Now & Replace Queue", then press ENTER.

Playback starts.

Operation buttons	Function
▶	Playback
II	Pause
■	Stop
I◀◀▶▶I	Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
CH/PAGE ▲▼	Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

• The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the main unit's STATUS is pressed.
• When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.
• If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files can be displayed.

NOTE

• When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In this case, connect using a wired LAN.
• The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

117

Contents Connections

Setti

■ Operations accessible through the option menu

• "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (p. 135)
• "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (☐ p. 136)
• "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (p. 137)
• "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (p. 139)
• "Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset)" (p. 140)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

118

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Getting the HEOS App

You can use many online music streaming services from the HEOS App. Depending upon your geographical location, there are several options to choose from.

Download the HEOS App for iOS or Android by searching App Store, Google Play store or Amazon Appstore for "HEOS".

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

119

HEOS Account

HEOS Accounts can be registered in "HEOS Account" (p. 258) in the menu of this unit or by tapping "Music" tab - "Settings" icon in the HEOS App.

■ What is a HEOS Account?

A HEOS Account is master account or "keychain" for managing all of your HEOS music services with one single username and password.

■ Why do I need a HEOS Account?

With the HEOS Account you just have to enter your music services login names and passwords one time. This allows you to easily and quickly use multiple controller apps on different devices.

You just log into your HEOS Account on any device and you will have access to all of your associated music services, play history and custom playlists, even if you are at a friend's house listening to music on their HEOS system.

■ Signing up for a HEOS Account

You will be instructed to signup for a HEOS Account the first time you try to access any music service from the main "Music" menu of the HEOS App.

■ Changing your HEOS Account

1 Tap the "Music" tab.
2 Select the Settings icon ⚙️ in the upper left corner of the screen.
3 Select "HEOS Account".
4 Change your location, change your password, delete your account or sign out of your account.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

120

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Playing from streaming music services

A music service is an online music company that provides access to vast music collections via free and/or paid subscriptions. Depending upon your geographical location, there are several options to choose from. For more information about which services are available in your area please visit http://www.HEOSbyDenon.com

NOTE

- The HEOS App and brand is not affiliated with any manufacturer of any mobile device. Availability of music services may vary by region. Not all services may be available at time of purchase. Some services may be added or discontinued from time to time based on decisions of the music service providers or others.

■ Selecting a room/device

1 Tap the "Rooms" tab, and select "Denon AVR-X4700H" if there are multiple products with HEOS Built-in.

- Tap the Pencil icon 📋 at the top right to switch edit mode. You can change the displayed name.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

121

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Selecting the music track or station from music sources

1 Tap the "Music" tab and select a music source.

- All music services displayed may not be available in your location.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

122

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

2 Browse the music to play.

After selecting a music track or radio station the app will automatically change to the "Now Playing" screen.

- When you select a music track to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now:	Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Now & Replace Queue:	Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.
Play Next:	Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.

Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.

- When you select a radio station the following items are displayed.

Play Now: Plays the selected item immediately.

Add to HEOS Favorites: Adds to HEOS Favorites.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

123

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Listening to the same music in multiple rooms

This system is a true multi-room audio system. You can create one or more HEOS groups to automatically synchronize audio playback between multiple products with HEOS Built-in so that the music playing different rooms is perfectly in sync and always sounds amazing! You can easily add up to 32 products to your system in total. You can group up to 16 individual products to have them play the same song fully synchronized.

■ Grouping rooms

1 Press and hold your finger on room that is not playing music.
2 Drag it into the room that is playing music (indicated by the red outline) and lift your finger.
3 The two rooms will be grouped together into a single device group and both rooms will be playing the same music in perfect sync.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

124

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Ungrouping rooms

1 Press and hold your finger on room that you want to remove from the group.
2 Drag it out of the group and lift your finger.

NOTE

- You can not remove the first room that started playing the music before grouping.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

125

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Grouping all rooms (party mode)

You can easily group 16 rooms together into Party Mode by using a "pinch" gesture.

1 Place two fingers on the screen over the list of rooms.
2 Quickly pinch your two fingers together and release.
3 All of your rooms will be joined together and begin playing the same music in perfect sync.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

126

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Ungrouping all rooms

You can easily ungroup all of your rooms and exit Party Mode by using a "spread" gesture.

1 Place two fingers close together on the screen over list of rooms.
2 Quickly spread your two fingers apart from each other and release.
3 All of your rooms will be ungrouped.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

127

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

AirPlay function

Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be played on this unit via the network.

• Source input will be switched to "HEOS Music" when AirPlay playback is started.
• You can stop AirPlay playback by choosing other input source.
  • To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit.
• For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes.
• The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.

This unit supports AirPlay 2.

Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous playback.

• This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.

graph LR
    PC["PC"] --> Router["Router"]
    Router --> ThisUnit["This unit"]
    ThisUnit --> Smartphone["Smartphone"]
    style PC fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Router fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style ThisUnit fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style Smartphone fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

128

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad

If you update your "iPhone/iPod touch/iPad" to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can stream music stored in your "iPhone/iPod touch/iPad" directly to this unit.

1 Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the same network as this unit.
- For details, see your device's manual.
2 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad. AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
3 Tap the AirPlay icon and select this unit.

[Example] iOS 12

[Example] iOS 10

Playing iTunes music with this unit

1 Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that is connected to the same network as this unit.
2 Turn this unit ON.
Set "Network Control" to "Always On" for this unit. (p. 256)

NOTE

- When "Network Control" is set to "Always On", the unit consumes more standby power.

3 Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon to select this unit.

[Example] iTunes

4 Choose a song and click play in iTunes. The music will stream to this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

129

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

NOTE

- In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume setting level. You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.

Play a song from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad on multiple synced devices (AirPlay 2)

Songs from an iPhone, iPod touch or iPad operating iOS 11.4 or later can be synced with multiple AirPlay 2 supported devices for simultaneous playback.

1 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad.

AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.

2 Tap the AirPlay icon.

Displays a list of devices/speakers that can be played back on the same network.

- A circle is displayed to the right of AirPlay 2 compatible devices.

3 Tap the devices/speakers you want to use.

- Multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices can be selected. - Volume can be adjusted for each device individually or for all synced devices simultaneously.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

130

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Spotify Connect function

Spotify is all the music you'll ever need. Millions of songs available instantly. Just search for the music you love, or let Spotify play you something great. Spotify works on your phone, tablet, computer and home speakers. So you'll always have the perfect soundtrack for whatever you're doing. Now you can enjoy Spotify with your free account as well as Premium account.

Use your phone, tablet or computer as a remote control for Spotify.

Go to www.spotify.com/connect to learn how.

The Spotify software is subject to third party licenses found here: www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses

graph TD
    A["Spotify server"] --> B["Spotify"]
    B --> C["Control"]
    C --> D["Spotify App"]
    E["This unit"] --> F["Audio streaming / control"]
    F --> C

Playing Spotify music with this unit

Download the "Spotify App" onto your Android or iOS device beforehand.

1 Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device in the same network as this unit.
2 Launch the Spotify App.
3 Play back the Spotify track.
4 Tap the Spotify icon 📋 to select the unit. The music will stream to this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

131

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Convenience functions

This section explains how to use convenient functions that can be used for each input source.

These functions can only be set in the MAIN ZONE.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

132

Contents Connections

Setti

Adding to HEOS Favorites

1 While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use to select “Add to HEOS Favorites”, then press ENTER.

Playing back HEOS Favorites

1 Press (HEOS Music).
2 Use △▽ to select "HEOS Favorites", then press ENTER.

3 Browse the content and select something to play.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

133

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Deleting a HEOS Favorites

1 While the HEOS Favorites content list is displayed, use to select the item you want to remove from HEOS Favorites, then press OPTION.
2 Use to select “Remove from HEOS Favorites”, then press ENTER.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

134

Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)

The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You can set this for each input source.

1 Press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use to select “Channel Level Adjust”, then press ENTER.

The "Channel Level Adjust" screen is displayed.

3 Use to select the channel that you wish to adjust.

4 Use ◀▷ to adjust the volume.

-12.0 dB - +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

5 Use △▽◀▷ to select "Exit", then press ENTER.

• Select "Reset" and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of the various channels to "0.0 dB" (Default).
• Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected.
• "Channel Level Adjust" settings are stored for each input source.
• You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set this when in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV". (P. 200)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

135

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Adjusting the tone (Tone)

Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.

1 Press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use to select “Tone”, then press ENTER.

The "Tone" screen is displayed.

3 Use ◀▷ to set the tone control function to on/off.

On: Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).

Off

(Default):

Playback without tone adjustment.

4 Select "On" in step 3 and press to select the sound range to be adjusted.

Bass: Adjust bass.

Treble: Adjust treble.

5 Use ◀▶ to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.

-6 dB - +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)

• "Tone" settings are stored for each input source.
• This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct".
• This item cannot be set when "Dynamic EQ" is set to "On". (p. 194)
• You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV". (1 p. 200)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

136

Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)

This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio playback. You can set this for each input source.

□ Supported input sources:

CD\* / Tuner / HEOS Music / Phono

* This cannot be set when any of the HDMI, component video or video connectors are assigned.

1 Press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use to select “Video Select”, then press ENTER.

The "Video Select" screen is displayed.

3 Use ◀▷ to select the Video Select mode.

Off

Disable Video Select mode.

(Default):

On: Enable Video Select mode.

4 If you selected "On" in step 3, press and select "Source".

5 Use ◀▷ to select the input source for video you want to play back, then press ENTER.

- "Video Select" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

137

Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)

□ Supported input sources :

CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX /

Media Player / CD* / TV Audio*

* You can set the picture mode when an HDMI, component video or video connector is assigned and "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". (17 p. 206)

1 Press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

2 Use to select “Picture Mode”, then press ENTER.

The "Picture Mode" screen is displayed.

3 Use ◀▷ to select the picture mode.

Off(Default):	No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.
Standard:	The standard mode suited for most living room viewing environments.
Movie:	A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as a theater room.
Vivid:	A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter and more vivid.
Streaming:	A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
ISF Day:	A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room during the day.
ISF Night:	A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at night.

Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.

4 Press ENTER.

- "Picture Mode" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

138

Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)

You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE simultaneously in ZONE2 and ZONE3 (another rooms). It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same background music in the entire house.

1 Press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.

The "All Zone Stereo" screen is displayed.

3 Select "Start", then press ENTER.

• The input sources for ZONE2 and ZONE3 are switched to the same input source as for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the All Zone Stereo mode.
• When you do not want ZONE2 or ZONE3 to participate in All Zone Stereo, press ENTER to clear the check mark and then press "Start".

■ Stopping the All Zone Stereo mode

1 During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.

3 Select "Stop", then press ENTER.

• The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN ZONE is turned off.
• In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the "Multi Ch Stereo" and "Stereo" sound modes can be selected.
• When "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV", the All Zone Stereo mode is not available. (15 p. 200)
• Save the All Zone Stereo mode playback status to the Quick Select Plus function to enable simple playback in All Zone Stereo mode with a single touch.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

139

Contents Connections

Setti

Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset)

Two speaker settings can be saved to suit the environments where you use your speakers.

1 Press OPTION.

An option menu screen is displayed.

- When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use to select “Speaker Preset”, then press ENTER.

The "Speaker Preset" screen is displayed.

3 Use ◀▷ to set the preset.

Preset 1

Use Preset 1.

(Default):

Preset 2: Use Preset 2.

- This function can be used in the following cases.

• Adjust the speaker settings manually after setting "Speaker Preset" to "Preset 2".
• Save the result to "Preset 2" after performing Audyssey® Setup for a second time.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

140

graph LR
    A["Contents"] --> B["Connections"]
    B --> C["Playback"]
    C --> D["Settings"]
    D --> E["Tips"]
    E --> F["Appendix"]

Selecting a sound mode

This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo playback modes.

Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from internet-based subscription services.

This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.

- For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

141

Remote

Index

Selecting a sound mode

1 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.

MOVIE :	Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying movies and TV programs.
MUSIC :	Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying music.
GAME :	Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying games.

• The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as the one selected at the previous playback.
• If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode, the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.

■ Switching the sound mode

• Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME, the sound mode changes.
• While the list is displayed, you can also use to select a sound mode.
• Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite mode.

- Please set the surround mode to Dolby Atmos/Surround when playing back Dolby Atmos encoded content. Dolby Atmos/Surround delivers the optimum playback experience from Blu-ray and streaming sources encoded with Dolby Atmos as well as channel based content. The default setting of this receiver is Dolby Atmos/Surround.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

142

Contents Connections

Setti

[Example] When MOVIE is pressed

This unit provides not only sound modes that conform to the formats recorded on discs such as Dolby and DTS, but also extended types of modes that match your speaker configuration and "original sound modes" that create atmosphere of Rock Arena and Jazz Club, etc.

Direct playback

Sound recorded in source is played as is.

1 Press PURE to select "Direct". Direct playback begins.

- While DSD signals are played back, "DSD Direct" is displayed.

Front panel D

Rear panel Rel

Index

143

Pure Direct playback

This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback mode.

This mode turns off the main unit display and analog video circuit. Doing so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.

1 Press PURE to select "Pure Direct".

The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins.

- In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted.

• Tone (p. 136)
• Restorer (p. 190)
• MultEQ ^ XT32 (p. 193)
  • Dynamic EQ (t首 p. 194)
  • Dynamic Volume (p. 195)
  • Graphic EQ (p. 196)

NOTE

• Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the Pure Direct mode.
• When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5 seconds.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

144

Auto surround playback

This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically selects the corresponding mode for playback.

Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.

1 Press PURE to select "Auto".

Auto surround playback begins.

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Description of sound mode types

Dolby sound mode

Sound mode type Description
Dolby Atmos	Please select this mode to play content encoded with Dolby Atmos. If you have selected a different sound mode previously, please select again this mode for Dolby Atmos content play back. It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and/or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field. An immersive audio experience can be enjoyed from traditional speaker layouts that do not employ overhead or Dolby Atmos Enabled Speakers by selecting the Speaker Virtualizer feature.
Dolby TrueHD Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby TrueHD at 192kHz/96kHz.
Dolby Digital Plus Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital Plus.
Dolby Digital Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital.
Dolby Surround	This mode uses Dolby Surround Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback. Use ceiling speakers such as top middle speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

145

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

DTS sound mode

Sound mode type Description
DTS Surround This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
DTS ES Dscrt6.1*1	This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.The surround back channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel.Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.
DTS ES Mtrx6.1*1	This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software recording time is decoded by this unit's matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right, surround back).
DTS 96/24 This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.
DTS-HD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.
DTS Express This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.
DTS:X This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with DTS:X.It decodes DTS:X content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

146

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Sound mode type Description
IMAX DTS	This mode is automatically activated when playing back IMAX Enhanced content featuring a DTS bitstream. (ICP p. 186)Also this mode is selectable when “Surround Parameter” - “IMAX” is set to “On” in the menu and a 48 kHz sampling frequency DTS 5.1 channel signal is being input.When “Speaker Config.” - “Surr. Back” is set to “2 spkrs”, “Speaker Config.” - “Center” is set to “Large” or “Small”, and sound mode is set to “IMAX DTS”, surround audio is output from the surround back speaker. Audio is not output from the surround speaker.The bass information of speakers are not redirected to the subwoofer, but getting a better bass effect from front and center speakers by special algorithm of IMAX when the “Front” and “Center” are set to “Small”.
IMAX DTS:X This mode is automatically activated when playing back IMAX Enhanced content featuring a DTS:X bitstream. (ICP p. 186)The bass information of speakers are not redirected to the subwoofer, but getting a better bass effect from front and center speakers by special algorithm of IMAX when the “Front” and “Center” are set to “Small”.
DTS Neural:X	This mode uses DTS Neural:X Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback. Use height speakers such as front height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
DTS Virtual:X*2*3	This mode uses DTS Virtual:X with virtual height and virtual surround processing to realize a three-dimensional sound field when the height speakers are not used.

*1 This can be selected when "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is not set to "None". (eP p. 239)
*2 It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos.
*3 This can be selected when Height, Ceiling and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers are not being used.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

147

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Auro-3D sound mode

Sound mode type Description
Auro-3D	This mode uses an Auro-3D decoder to create three-dimensional audio output using the Height Channel. It is ideal for playback of signals encoded as Auro-3D with a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as Auro-3D are input, an Upmixer called the Auro-Matic is used to create highly realistic three-dimensional audio output.
Auro-2D Surround	This mode uses an Auro-3D decoder to create Surround Sound without a Height Channel. It is ideal for playback of signals encoded as Auro-3D without a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as Auro-3D are input, an Upmixer called the Auro-Matic is used to output Surround Sound.

PCM multi-channel sound mode

Sound mode type Description

Multi Ch In This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM/DSD sources.

Original sound mode

Sound mode type Description
Multi Ch Stereo This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.
Rock Arena This mode simulates the expansive sound of a live concert in an arena.
Jazz Club This mode simulates the experience of being in an intimate jazz club.
Mono Movie	This mode works with monaural audio sources and delivers a surround sound effect. For optimum channel balance and surround sound effects, connect the monaural source to both of the front (L/R) audio inputs.
Video Game This mode provides an exciting, dynamic surround sound effect with your favorite action video games.
Matrix This mode adds a spacious surround sound effect with stereo music sources.
Virtual This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound effect when playing back through just the front (L/R) speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

148

Remote

Index

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Auto sound mode

Sound mode type Description

Auto

In this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Atmos, DTS, DTS-HD, DTS:X, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches automatically to the corresponding mode.If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.

Stereo sound mode

Sound mode type Description
Stereo This mode plays 2-channel	annel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing.Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected.When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no additional surround sound processing.

Direct sound mode

Sound mode type Description

Direct This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source.

Pure Direct This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the “Direct” mode.The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality.• Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.)• The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

149

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal

• The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons.
• Adjust the sound field effect with the menu "Surround Parameter" to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (p. 183)

*1 2-channel also includes analog input.
*2 This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1, 7.1, 9.1 or 11.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used or when the speaker configuration is front speakers only.
*3 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used.
*4 It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos.
*5 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration without front height or front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers is used.
*6 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

150

Contents Connections

Settings Tips

Appendix

	Sound modelInput signal	MOVIE button	MUSIC button	GAME button
Multi-channel *7	Stereo	○	○	○
Dolby Digital	Dolby Digital	○	○	○
	Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround *8 ○	○	○
	Dolby Digital + Neural:X *8 ○	○	○
Dolby Digital Plus	Dolby Digital Plus	○	○	○
	Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surround *8*9	○	○	○
	Dolby Digital Plus + Neural:X *8 ○	○	○
	Dolby Atmos *8*10 ○	○	○
Dolby TrueHD	Dolby TrueHD	○	○	○
	Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surround *8*9 ○	○	○
	Dolby TrueHD + Neural:X *8 ○	○	○
	Dolby Atmos *8*10 ○	○	○
Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos		○	○	○

*7 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels.
*8 This cannot be selected when headphones are used.
*9 This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos.
*10 This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

151

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

*3 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used.
*7 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels.
*8 This cannot be selected when headphones are used.
*11 Selectable when "Surround Parameter" - "IMAX" is set to "On" in the menu and a 48 kHz sampling frequency DTS 5.1 channel signal is being input. (T p. 186)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

152

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

*3 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used.
*7 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels.
*8 This cannot be selected when headphones are used.
*12 Selectable when "Surround Parameter" - "IMAX" is set to "Auto" in the menu. When "IMAX" is set to "Off", playback is normal DTS or DTS:X. (187 p. 186)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

153

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

	Sound modelInput signal	MOVIE button	MUSIC button	GAME button
Multi-channel *7	Auro-3D *5 ○	○
	Auro-2D Surround *6 ○	○
	Multi Ch Stereo	○	○	○
	Mono Movie	○
	Rock Arena		○
	Jazz Club		○
	Matrix		○
	Video Game			○
	Virtual	○	○	○

*5 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration without front height or front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers is used.
*6 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.
*7 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

154

Contents Connections

Setti

■ Views on the display

graph TD
    A["①"] --> B["②"]
    C["②"] --> D["②"]
    E["②"] --> F["②"]

① Shows a decoder to be used.
- In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, "DDD+” is displayed.
② Shows a decoder that creates sound output.
- “indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

155

HDMI Control function

A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with another device via the HDMI cable connection.

Setting procedure

1 Enable the HDMI Control function of this unit.
Set "HDMI Control" to "On". (p. 202)
2 Turn the power on for all the devices connected by HDMI cable.
3 Set the HDMI Control function for all devices connected by HDMI cable.

- Please consult the operating instructions for the connected devices to check the settings.

- Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.

4 Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected to this unit.

5 Switch the input source of this unit to check that video from the player connected by HDMI is played back correctly.
6 When you turn the TV's power to standby, check that the power of this unit also goes to standby.

NOTE

• Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check the owner's manual of each device for details beforehand.
• The HDMI ZONE2 function is not compatible with the HDMI Control function.
• When the HDMI ZONE2 function is used with "HDMI Control" in the menu set to "On", the HDMI ZONE2 function may not fully work.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

156

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Smart Menu function

This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV remote control.

1 Enable the HDMI Control function of this unit and the TV. (☐ p. 202)
2 Set "Smart Menu" to "On" on this unit. (p. 204)
3 Select "AV Receiver" in a TV menu such as "Input"* or "Operate Connected HDMI Device"*.

The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV.

- This unit can be operated with the TV remote control while the Smart Menu is displayed.

* The selection method differs depending on your TV.

Now Playing

Enjoy content from the input source currently selected on this unit.

Source

Switch the input of this unit.

If you select "HEOS Music" or "Tuner", you can continue to operate this unit using the TV remote control.

Sound Mode

Change the sound mode of this unit.

You can select from the following three sound modes.

Surround:	Surround sound playback according to the input signal.
Stereo: Stereo playback.
Multi Ch Stereo: Multi-channel stereo playback.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

157

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Setup Menu

Displays a setup menu for configuring the settings of this unit.

Quick Select

Calls up the "Quick Select" items registered to this unit.

NOTE

• If the "HDMI Control" or "Smart Menu" settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.
• The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the specifications of your TV. In this case, set "Smart Menu" to "Off". (19 p. 204)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

158

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Sleep timer function

You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to sleep. The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

159

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Using the sleep timer

1 Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with the remote control.

The button for the selected zone is lit.

2 Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.

• The indicator lights up on the display and the sleep timer starts.
• You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in steps of 10 minutes.

- Checking the remaining time

Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation.

The remaining time appears on the display.

■ To cancel the sleep timer

Press SLEEP to select "Off".

The 5 indicator on the display turns off.

- The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.

NOTE

- The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this unit. To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the connected devices themselves.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

160

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Quick select plus function

Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be registered to the QUICK SELECT 1 - 4 buttons.

You can simply press one of the registered QUICK SELECT buttons in subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch. By saving frequently used settings at the QUICK SELECT 1 – 4 buttons, you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment. The Quick Select Plus function can be memorized for each zone.

- The QUICK SELECT button on main unit can only be used to operate the MAIN ZONE.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

161

Remote

Index

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Calling up the settings

1 Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with the remote control.

The button for the selected zone is lit.

2 Press QUICK SELECT.

The Quick Select settings registered to the button you pressed are called up.

- The default settings for the input source are as shown below.

- Volume is not registered to Quick Select Plus in the factory default settings. See "Changing the settings" to register volume to Quick Select Plus. (16) p. 163

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

162

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Changing the settings

1 Set the items below to the settings you want to register.

The following settings from ① to ⑪ can be memorized for MAIN ZONE, and settings ① and ② can be memorized for ZONE2 and ZONE3.

① Input source (p. 91)
② Volume (p. 92)
③ Sound mode (p. 141)
④ Audyssey (Audyssey MultEQ ^® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® , Audyssey Dynamic Volume ^® , Audyssey LFC ^™ ) (p. 193)
⑤ "Restorer" (p. 190)
⑥ "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (15 p. 135)
⑦ "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (10 p. 137)
⑧ “Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)” (p. 138)
⑨ "All Zone Stereo" (p. 139)
⑩ "Speaker Preset" (p. 140)
⑪ "HDMI Video Output" (p. 205)

• Press and hold QUICK SELECT while a radio station is being received is being played back with any of the following sources, the current radio station is memorized.
• Tuner / Internet Radio Station

2 Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with the remote control.

The button for the selected zone is lit.

3 Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until "Quick\* Memory", "Z2 Quick\* Memory" or "Z3 Quick\* Memory" appears on the display.

The current settings will be memorized.

* is displayed the number for the QUICK SELECT button you pressed.

■ Changing the Quick Select Name

The MAIN ZONE Quick Select name displayed on the TV screen or display of this unit can be changed to a different name.

For the name change method, see "Quick Select Names". (10 p. 266)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

163

Panel lock function

To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of the buttons on the front panel.

Disabling all key button operations

1 Press ⏻ while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use to select "FP/VOL LOCK On".
3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. All button operations except ⏻ are disabled.

Disabling all button operations except VOLUME

1 Press ⏻ while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use to select "FP LOCK On".
3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. All button operations except ⏻ and VOLUME are disabled.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

164

Contents Connections

Setti

Canceling the Panel lock function

1 Press ⏻ while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use to select "FP LOCK *Off". (* The currently set mode.)
3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. The Panel lock function is canceled.

- Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the remote control unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

165

Remote lock function

When connecting an IR receiver, enable the Remote lock function. When the function is enabled, you can not perform operations with the remote control unit.

By default, this function is disabled.

Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit

1 Press ⏻ while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use to select “RC LOCK On”.
3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. The infrared light receiving function is disabled.

Enabling the remote sensor function

1 Press ⏻ while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use to select "RC LOCK *Off". (* The currently set mode.)
3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. Infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

166

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendix

Web control function

You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.

graph LR
    A["Laptop"] --> B["RouterPC"]
    B --> C["This unit"]
    D["Tablet"]

• This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in order to use the web control function. (Kp. 85)
• Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the security-related software.

Controlling the unit from a web control

1 Switch the "Network Control" setting to "Always On". (p. 256)
2 Check the IP address of this unit with "Information". (p. 251)

3 Start up the web browser.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

167

Contents Connections

Setti

ngs Tips Appendi

4 Enter the IP address of this unit in browser's address box.

For example, if the IP address of this unit is "192.168.100.19", enter "http://192.168.100.19".

5 When the top menu is displayed on the web browser, click on the menu item you want to operate.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

168

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room)

You can operate this unit to enjoy video and audio in a room (ZONE2 and ZONE3) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE). You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Connecting ZONE

You can use the following three methods to play back video and audio in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

• "Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector" (p. 169)
• “Connection through the video output connector and speaker output connector” (p. 170)
• "Connection through the video output connector and external power amplifiers" (p. 173)

■ Connection 1 : Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector

When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, you can play back a video or audio from the device connected to the HDMI 1 - 6 IN connector in ZONE2 (HDMI ZONE2 function).

graph LR
    A["This unit"] --> B["HDMI ZONE2"]
    B --> C["+"]
    C --> D["HDMI"]
    D --> E["+"]
    E --> F["+"]
    F --> G["+"]
    G --> H["+"]
    H --> I["+"]
    I --> J["+"]
    J --> K["+"]
    K --> L["+"]
    L --> M["+"]
    M --> N["+"]
    N --> O["+"]
    O --> P["+"]
    P --> Q["+"]
    Q --> R["+"]
    R --> S["+"]
    S --> T["+"]
    T --> U["+"]
    U --> V["+"]
    V --> W["+"]
    W --> X["+"]
    X --> Y["+"]
    Y --> Z["+"]
    Z --> AA["+"]
    AA --> AB["+"]
    AB --> AC["+"]
    AC --> AD["+"]
    AD --> AE["+"]
    AE --> AF["+"]
    AF --> AG["+"]
    AG --> AH["+"]
    AH --> AI["+"]
    AI --> AJ["+"]
    AJ --> AK["+"]
    AK --> AL["+"]
    AL --> AM["+"]
    AM --> AN["+"]
    AN --> AO["+"]
    AO --> AP["+"]
    AP --> AQ["+"]
    AQ --> AR["+"]
    AR --> AS["+"]
    AS --> AT["+"]
    AT --> AU["+"]
    AU --> AV["+"]
    AV --> AW["+"]
    AW --> AX["+"]
    AX --> AY["+"]
    AY --> AZ["+"]
    AZ --> BA["+"]
    BA --> BB["+"]
    BB --> BC["+"]
    BC --> BD["+"]
    BD --> BE["+"]
    BE --> BF["+"]
    BF --> BG["+"]
    BG --> BH["+"]
    BH --> BI["+"]
    BI --> BJ["+"]
    BJ --> BK["+"]
    BK --> BL["+"]
    BL --> BM["+"]
    BM --> BN["+"]
    BN --> BO["+"]
    BO --> BP["+"]
    BP --> BQ["+"]
    BQ --> BR["+"]
    BR --> BS["+"]
    BS --> BT["+"]
    BT --> BU["+"]
    BU --> BV["+"]
    BV --> BW["+"]
    BW --> BX["+"]
    BX --> BY["+"]
    BY --> BZ["+"]

- When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, and the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source, the MAIN ZONE audio may be mixed down to 2-channel audio.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

169

graph LR
    A["Contents"] --> B["Connections"]
    B --> C["Playback"]
    C --> D["Settings"]
    D --> E["Tips"]
    E --> F["Appendix"]

■ Connection 2 : Connection through the video output connector and speaker output connector

When "Assign Mode" in the menu is set to any of the following audio is output from speakers in ZONE2 or ZONE3. (p. 230)

☐ Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE2

graph TD
    subgraph MAIN ZONE
        A["This unit"] --> B["Component Video"]
        B --> C["Resistor 1"]
        B --> D["Resistor 2"]
        B --> E["Resistor 3"]
        F["Height2 0"] --> G["Resistor 1"]
        F --> H["Resistor 2"]
        I["Height2 U"] --> J["Resistor 1"]
        I --> K["Resistor 2"]
    end
    subgraph ZONE2
        L["VIDEO IN"] --> M["Component Video"]
        M --> N["Resistor 1"]
        M --> O["Resistor 2"]
        M --> P["Resistor 3"]
        Q["(L)(R)"] --> R["Resistor 1"]
        Q --> S["Resistor 2"]
        T["Resistor 3"] --> U["Resistor 4"]
    end
    style MAIN ZONE fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style ZONE2 fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

☐ Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE3

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

170

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

☐ Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO

graph TD
    A["MAIN ZONE"] --> B["This unit"]
    B --> C["MONITOR ZONE"]
    C --> D["VIDEO IN"]
    C --> E["VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO"]
    D --> F["Video IN"]
    E --> G["Video COMPONENT VIDEO"]
    F --> H["Video IN"]
    G --> I["Video COMPONENT VIDEO"]
    H --> J["Output Display"]
    I --> J
    K["HEIGHT2 Unit"] --> L["Height2 Unit"]
    L --> M["Display Device"]
    M --> N["Output Display"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

171

graph LR
    A["Contents"] --> B["Connections"]
    B --> C["Playback"]
    C --> D["Settings"]
    D --> E["Tips"]
    E --> F["Appendix"]

☐ Assign Mode: 5.1ch + ZONE2/3

graph TD
    A["MAIN ZONE This unit"] --> B["VIDEO IN"]
    A --> C["COMPONENT VIDEO IN"]
    B --> D["VIDEO (L)(R)"]
    C --> E["COMPONENT VIDEO (L)(R)"]
    D --> F["OUTPUT"]
    E --> F
    G["HEIGHT1 R"] --> H["OUTPUT"]
    I["HEIGHT2 R"] --> J["OUTPUT"]
    K["HEIGHT3 R"] --> L["OUTPUT"]
    M["HEIGHT4 R"] --> N["OUTPUT"]
    O["HEIGHT5 R"] --> P["OUTPUT"]
    Q["HEIGHT6 R"] --> R["OUTPUT"]
    S["HEIGHT7 R"] --> T["OUTPUT"]
    U["HEIGHT8 R"] --> V["OUTPUT"]
    W["HEIGHT9 R"] --> X["OUTPUT"]
    Y["HEIGHT10 R"] --> Z["OUTPUT"]
    AA["HEIGHT11 R"] --> AB["OUTPUT"]
    AC["HEIGHT12 R"] --> AD["OUTPUT"]
    AE["HEIGHT13 R"] --> AF["OUTPUT"]
    AG["HEIGHT14 R"] --> AH["OUTPUT"]
    AI["HEIGHT15 R"] --> AJ["OUTPUT"]
    AK["HEIGHT16 R"] --> AL["OUTPUT"]
    AM["HEIGHT17 R"] --> AN["OUTPUT"]
    AO["HEIGHT18 R"] --> AP["OUTPUT"]
    AQ["HEIGHT19 R"] --> AR["OUTPUT"]
    AS["HEIGHT20 R"] --> AT["OUTPUT"]
    AU["HEIGHT21 R"] --> AV["OUTPUT"]
    AW["HEIGHT22 R"] --> AX["OUTPUT"]
    AY["ZONE3ZONI"] --> AZ["(L)(R)"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style U fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AE fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style W fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AQ fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AG fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AH fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AJ fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AK fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AL fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AM fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AN fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AO fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AU fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style AV fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

Connection 3 : Connection through the video output connector and external power amplifiers

The audio signals of this unit's ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors are played on the ZONE2 and ZONE3 power amplifiers.

graph TD
    A["MAIN ZONE"] --> B["This unit"]
    B --> C["Monitor"]
    C --> D["Video In"]
    D --> E["Power amplifier"]
    E --> F["AUX IN"]
    G["ZONE2"] --> H["VIDEO"]
    H --> I["COMPONENT VIDEO IN"]
    I --> J["Y"]
    I --> K["Pb Pr"]
    J --> L["Power amplifier"]
    K --> L
    L --> M["AUX IN"]
    N["ZONE3"] --> O["Power amplifier"]
    O --> P["AUX IN"]
    P --> Q["Power amplifier"]
    Q --> R["AUX IN"]
    S["OR"] --> T["Power amplifier"]
    T --> U["AUX IN"]

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

173

Contents Connections

Settings Tips Appendix

• If the input for ZONE2 and ZONE3 is set to "Source", all types of input signals can be listened to from ZONE2 and ZONE3.
• If the input for ZONE2 is set to a specific source (like CBL/SAT), only analog signal or 2-channel PCM signal input (from HDMI connectors or digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL)) can be listened to from ZONE2. To playback HDMI signal other than 2-channel PCM in ZONE2, set "HDMI Audio" to "PCM". (107) p. 265) 2-channel PCM signals are output from a device connected to the input source selected for ZONE2 and can be played back in ZONE2. In this case, the MAIN ZONE audio will also be converted to 2-channel PCM signals if the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source. However, depending on the playback device, the playback signal may not be converted to PCM even if this setting is configured.
• The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE3.
• When "Component Video Out" in the menu is set to "ZONE2", the component video output connector outputs the ZONE2 video. (p. 209)
• The menu screen is not output in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

174

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

175

1 Press Z2 or Z3 to switch the zone mode.

Z2 or Z3 button lights.

2 Press POWER ⏻ to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power.

The MULTI ZONE indicator on the display lights.

- Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.

3 Press the input source select button to select the input source to be played.

The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or ZONE3.

- To perform an operation with the main unit, press ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE. Each time you press ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE, the input source changes.

- Setting the input source of ZONE2 as the "Source" allows you to play the same content in MAIN ZONE and in ZONE2, regardless of the type of input signal.

• Set the input source of ZONE2 as the "Source" by pressing the ZONE2 SOURCE button on the main unit.
• If the MAIN ZONE input source is changed while ZONE2 is selected as the "Source", then ZONE2's input source will be changed to mirror the MAIN ZONE's input source.
• As well as ZONE2, you can play the same content of MAIN ZONE when the input source of ZONE3 is set as "Source".

Contents

Connections

back

Appendix

■ Adjusting the volume (ZONE2/ZONE3)

Use VOLUME ▲▼ to adjust the volume.

- At time of purchase, "Volume Limit" is set to "70 (-10 dB)". (P. 265)

- Turn MASTER VOLUME after pressing ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE on the main unit to adjust the volume.

■ Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2/ZONE3)

Press MUTE 📄X.

The sound is reduced to the level set at "Mute Level" in the menu. (☐ p. 266)
- To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE 📄X again.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

176

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Menu map

When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV.

The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.

Setting items	Detailed items Description Page
Audio	Center Level Adjust	Adjusts the center channel volume to clarify the dialog for all sources.	182
	Subwoofer Level Adjust Adjusts	Adjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources. 182
	Bass Sync	Adjusts the phase shift when there is a delay in the bass (LFE) recorded on a disc.	183
	Surround Parameter Adjusts	surround sound parameters. 183
	Restorer Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as MP3 files to enable richer audio playback.		190
	Audio Delay Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio. 191
	Volume Sets the MAIN ZONE	(room where the unit is located) volume setting. 192
	Audyssey	Makes Audyssey MultEQ ^ XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^ , Audyssey Dynamic Volume ^ and Audyssey LFC ^TM settings.	193
	Graphic EQ	Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.	196
Video	Picture Adjust	Adjusts picture quality.	198
	HDMI Setup	Makes settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings.	200
	Output Settings	Makes settings for video output.	205
	Component Video Out	Sets whether to use the component video output connector for MAIN ZONE or ZONE2.	209
	On Screen Display	Configures the on-screen display settings.	209
	Screen Saver	Select the screen saver setting.	210
	4K/8K Signal Format	Sets signal format options for your 4K or 8K video equipment.	211
	HDCP Setup	Sets the HDCP version for each HDMI input source.	212
	TV Format	Sets the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.	213

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

177

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting items Detailed items Description Page
Inputs	Input Assign Changes input connector assignment and the audio input mode. 214
	Source Rename Changes the display name for input source. 217
	Hide Sources Removes from the display input sources that are not used. 217
	Source Level Adjusts the play back level of the audio input. 218
Speakers	Audyssey® Setup	The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically.	219
	Manual Setup	Sets up the speakers manually or changes Audyssey® Setup settings.	230
Network	Information Displays network information. 251
	Connection Selects whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. 251
	Settings Used for manually setting the IP address. 254
	Network Control	Enables network communication in standby power mode.	256
	Friendly Name	The “Friendly Name” is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.	256
	Diagnostics	Used to check the network connection.	257
	AirPlay	Settings for Apple AirPlay.	257

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

178

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting items Detailed items Description Page
HEOS Account	[When the user is signed out the HEOS Account]
	I have a HEOS Account Selects to sign in. 258
	Create Account Creates new	HEOS Account. 258
	Forgot Password	If you forgot your password, we'll send you an email with instructions about how to reset it.	258
	[When the user is signed in the HEOS Account]
	Signed in As Displays your HEOS Account. 258
	Change Location Selects your location. 258
	Change Password Changes your HEOS Account Password. 258
	Delete Account Deletes your HEOS Account. 258
	Sign Out Sign out of your HEOS Account. 258

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

179

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting items Detailed items Description Page
General	Language Changes the language of the display on the TV screen. 259
	ECO Configures the ECO Mode and Auto Standby energy-saving functions. 259
	Bluetooth Transmitter Sets Bluetooth transmitter settings. 263
	ZONE2 Setup/ZONE3 Setup	Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3. 264
	Zone Rename Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer. 266
	Quick Select Names Changes the Quick Select Name display title to one you prefer. 266
	Trigger Out 1/Trigger Out 2	Select the conditions for activating trigger out function. 267
	Front Display	Makes settings related to the display on this unit.	267
	Firmware	Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display.	268
	Information	Shows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.	271
	Usage Data	Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Denon.	273
	Save & Load	Save and restore device settings by using a USB memory device.	273
	Setup Lock	Protects settings from inadvertent changes.	274
	Reset	Various settings are reset to the factory default values. 274
Setup Assistant	Begin Setup...	Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the guidance indicated on the TV screen.	Page 9 of the separate manual“Quick Start Guide”
	Language Select	Sets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen.
	Speaker Setup
	Speaker Calibration
	Network Setup
	TV Audio Connection
	Input Setup
	Mobile Apps

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

180

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Menu operations

1 Press MAIN on the remote control unit to set the operating zone to the MAIN ZONE. The MAIN button lights.
2 Press SETUP. The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3 Use to select the menu to be set or operated, then press ENTER.
4 Use ◀▷ to change to desired setting.
5 Press ENTER to enter the setting.

• To return to the previous item, press BACK.
• Exiting the menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The menu display disappears.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

181

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Audio

Make audio-related settings.

Center Level Adjust

Adjusts the center channel volume to clarify the dialog for all sources.

Center

Adjusts the volume output from the center channel.

-12.0 dB - +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

- This setting is also reflected in the center channel level in the "Speakers" - "Levels" menu settings. (12 p. 244)

Subwoofer Level Adjust

Adjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources.

■ Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2

Adjusts the volume level for the Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer 2.

-12.0 dB - +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

- This setting is also reflected in the subwoofer channel level in the "Speakers" - "Levels" menu settings. (i.e. p. 244)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

182

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Bass Sync

For contents recorded in multi-channel such as Blu-ray discs, the recorded low frequency effects (LFE) may be out of synch and delayed. This function corrects such a delay of low frequency effects (LFE).

0 ms - 16 ms (Default : 0 ms)

• How low frequency effects (LFE) are delayed differ according to the disc. Set this to the desired value.
• "Bass Sync" settings are stored for each input source.
• This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal.

Surround Parameter

You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your preferences.

The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set sound mode.

• Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings during playback.
• "Surround Parameter" settings are stored for each sound mode.

Cinema EQ

Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce possible harshness and improve clarity.

On: "Cinema EQ" is used.

Off (Default): "Cinema EQ" is not used.

- This item cannot be set when sound mode is "Direct", "Pure Direct", "Stereo" and "Original sound mode".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

183

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Loudness Management

This sets whether to output as specified in "Dynamic Compression" or output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio recorded in the disc.

On(Default):	Outputs are given based on enabling the settings made in “Dynamic Compression” and Dialogue normalization function.
Off:	“Dynamic Compression” settings and Dialogue normalization are disabled, and the signals on the disc are output as is.

- "Loudness Management" can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and Dolby Atmos signal is input.

■ Dynamic Compression

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

Auto:	Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to source.
Low / Medium / High: These set the compression level.
Off:	Dynamic range compression is always off.

• "Dynamic Compression" can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos or DTS signal is input.
• The default setting is "Off". When the input signal is the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos source, the default setting is "Auto".
• "Auto" cannot be set when inputting a DTS signal.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

184

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Dialog Control

Adjust the volume of dialog in movies, vocals in music, etc. so these can be heard more easily.

0 - 6 (Default : 0)

- This can be set when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control function is input.

■ Low Frequency Effects

Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).

-10 dB - 0 dB (Default: 0 dB)

• This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal.
• This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
• For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the values below.
  • Dolby Digital sources: 0 dB
  • DTS movie sources: 0 dB
  • DTS music sources: -10 dB

■ Speaker Virtualizer

The Speaker Virtualizer enhances the surround and height speaker channels to create an enveloping virtual surround effect.

On

Enables "Speaker Virtualizer".

(Default):

Off: Disables "Speaker Virtualizer".

• You can set this when the sound mode is "Dolby Atmos", "Dolby Surround" or sound mode that has "+Dolby Surround" in the sound mode name.
• Usable when not using height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers, or when not using surround speakers.
• Audio is not output from the surround back speaker if "Speaker Virtualizer" is set to "On" when "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is set to "1 spkr" in the menu.

■ DTS Neural:X

DTS Neural:X Expands the non-object based audio signals and optimizes them for your speaker configuration.

On

Use "DTS Neural:X".

(Default):

Off: Do not use "DTS Neural:X".

- You can set this when sound mode is "DTS:X" or "DTS:X MSTR".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

185

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

IMAX

Sets the audio mode for IMAX playback.

Auto(Default):	Automatically enables the IMAX mode when IMAX content is detected.
On:	Enables IMAX settings for IMAX streaming content when automatic detection is not possible.

Off: Disables the IMAX mode.

• In case of streaming the IMAX contents from online streaming service using TV Apps or player Apps (such as Blu-ray player's App), this unit may not detect the signal as IMAX contents automatically. In this case, you can enable IMAX mode by setting this parameter to "On" manually.
• This setting can only be turned "On" when DTS 5.1 channel content recorded as IMAX DTS is input.
• This setting cannot be set when headphones are used.

IMAX Audio Settings

You can configure special IMAX audio settings to recreate the conditions of an IMAX theater.

Auto(Default):	Applies the optimized speaker settings to reproduce similar to the IMAX theater environment.
Manual:	Manually adjusts the “High Pass Filter”, “Low Pass Filter” and “Subwoofer Mode”.

• You can set this when sound mode is "IMAX DTS" or "IMAX DTS:X".
• "Speakers" - "Crossovers", "Bass" - "Subwoofer Mode" and "LPF for LFE" in the menu cannot be applied during IMAX playback.

■ High Pass Filter

Set the high pass filter cutoff frequency for all speakers during IMAX playback.

40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)

- You can set this when "IMAX Audio Settings" is set to "Manual".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

186

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Low Pass Filter

Set the low pass filter cutoff frequency of the LFE signal during IMAX playback.

80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 120 Hz)

- You can set this when "IMAX Audio Settings" is set to "Manual".

Subwoofer Mode

Set the bass signal to be played by the subwoofer during IMAX playback.

On:	The low range signal of all speakers is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer. The LFE signal and the bass component of each speaker is played.
Off (Default):	Only the LFE signal is played.

- You can set this when "IMAX Audio Settings" is set to "Manual".

■ Auro-Matic 3D Preset

Selects the Auro-Matic 3D Preset for fine tuning the Auro-3D experience to specific audio material.

Small:	“Small” is ideal for pop and chamber music.
Medium (Default):	“Medium” is best used on jazz music or typical movies and TV shows.
Large:	“Large” is ideal for recordings that were recorded in large spaces (e.g. orchestral recording).
Movie:	“Movie” is ideal for experiencing a large-cinema effect for watching movies (e.g. action movies with big explosions).
Speech:	“Speech” is ideal for recordings which are mostly dialog (e.g. news broadcast), and that have virtually no inherent spatial information.

• You can set this when the sound mode is set to Auro-3D.
• This cannot be set if the input signal contains Auro-3D signals containing a Height channel.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

187

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Auro-Matic 3D Strength

Changes the level of the up-mixed channels in relation to the original input signal.

The value ranges from 1 (no up-mixing) to 16 (Maximum level, providing maximum effect).

1 - 16 (Default:10)

• You can set this when the sound mode is set to Auro-3D.
• This cannot be set if the input signal contains Auro-3D signals containing a Height channel.

■ Auro-3D Mode

Select how to output sound to all speakers when Auro-3D decoding is active.

Channel Expansion (Default):	Incoming Auro-3D content is expanded to additional speakers. All speakers configured for Auro-3D will output sound.
Direct:	Incoming Auro-3D content is sent directly to each corresponding channel. No content is sent to additional speakers.

- You can set this when the input signal contains Auro-3D signal and sound mode is set to Auro-3D.

Delay Time

Adjust the audio delay time against video to extend the sound field image.

0 ms - 300 ms (Default: 30 ms)

- You can set this when the sound mode is "Matrix".

Effect Level

Adjust the sound effect level of the current sound mode.

1 - 15 (Default: 10)

• This item can be set when sound mode is "Rock Arena", "Jazz Club", "Mono Movie" and "Video Game".
• Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround signals seems unnatural.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

188

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Room Size

Determine size of acoustic environment.

Small: Simulate acoustics of a small room.

Medium small:	Simulate acoustics of a medium-small room.
Medium (Default):	Simulate acoustics of a medium room.
Medium large:	Simulate acoustics of a medium-large room.

Large: Simulate acoustics of a large room.

• This item can be set when sound mode is "Rock Arena", "Jazz Club", "Mono Movie" and "Video Game".
• "Room Size" does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played.

Speaker Select

Makes settings for the speakers outputting sound.

Floor: Plays back without height speakers.

Floor & Height(Default):

Plays back with height speakers.

- This can be set when the sound mode is the original sound mode.

Subwoofer

Turn subwoofer output on and off.

On(Default):

The subwoofer is used.

Off: The subwoofer is not used.

- You can set this when the sound mode is "Direct" or "Stereo" and in the menu "Subwoofer Mode" is set to "LFE+Main". (15 p. 246)

Set Defaults

The "Surround Parameter" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

189

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Restorer

Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The "Restorer" function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded tonal range.

■ Mode

High:	Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs (64 kbps and under).
Medium:	Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources (96 kbps and under).
Low:	Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs (96 kbps and over).
Off: Do not use “Restorer”.

• This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input.
• This item default setting for "HEOS Music" is "Low". All others are set to "Off".
• This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct".
• "Restorer" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

190

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Audio Delay

Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.

• Audio Delay for game mode can be set when "Video Mode" is set to "Auto" or "Game". (1 p. 206)
• "Audio Delay" settings are stored for each input source.

■ Auto Lip Sync

Automatically adjusts the audio processing time to compensate for delays in audio/video timing from TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync.

On

(Default):

Correct automatically.

Off: Do not correct automatically.

- Automatic correction may not be performed depending on the specifications of your TV even when "Auto Lip Sync" is set to "On".

Adjust

The timing mismatch between the picture and sound needs to be corrected manually.

0 ms - 500 ms (Default : 0 ms)

• You can also finely adjust the delay correction value set by "Auto Lip Sync".
• Adjust for game mode can be set when "Video Mode" is set to "Auto" or "Game". (17) p. 206

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

191

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Volume

Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.

Scale

Set how volume is displayed.

0 - 98(Default):	Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.
-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB:	Display ---dB (Min), in the range -79.5 dB to 18.0 dB.

- "Scale" settings are reflected in all the zones.

Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

60 - 80 (-20 dB - 0 dB)

Off (Default)

- The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is "-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB". (Kp. 192)

Power On Level

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Last (Default):	Use the memorized setting from the last session.
Mute:	Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.

1 - 98 (-79 dB - 18 dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.

- The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is "-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB". (p. 192)

Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

Full (Default): The sound is muted entirely.

-40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.

-20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

192

Audyssey®

Set Audyssey MultEQ ^® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® , Audyssey Dynamic Volume ^® and Audyssey LFC ^™ . These can be selected after Audyssey ^® Setup has been performed.

For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see "Explanation of terms" (p. 320).

• "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ", "Reference Level Offset", "Dynamic Volume", "Audyssey LFC™" and "Containment Amount" settings are stored for each input source.
• When the sound mode is in the "Direct" or "Pure Direct" mode, "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ", "Dynamic Volume" and "Audyssey LFC™" settings cannot be configured.
• When the sound mode is in "DTS Virtual:X" or sound mode that have "+Virtual:X" in the sound mode name, "Dynamic EQ", "Dynamic Volume" and "Audyssey LFC™" settings cannot be configured.
• This item cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.

■ MultEQ® XT32

MultEQ ^® XT32 compensates for both time and frequency characteristics of the listening area based on Audyssey ^® Setup measurement results. Selection is done from three types of compensation curves. We recommend the “Reference” setting.

Reference (Default):	Selects the default calibrated setting with a slight roll off at high frequencies, which is optimized for movies.
L/R Bypass:	Selects the reference setting, but bypasses MultEQ® XT32 on the front left and right speakers.
Flat:	Selects the calibrated setting which is optimized for small rooms where your listening position is closer to the speakers.
Off:	Do not use “MultEQ® XT32”.

- When using headphones, "MultEQ® XT32" is automatically set to "Off".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

193

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Dynamic EQ

Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics.

Works with MultEQ ^® XT32.

On

Use "Dynamic EQ".

(Default):

Off: Do not use "Dynamic EQ".

• When the menu "Dynamic EQ" setting is "On", it is not possible to do "Tone" adjustment. (17 p. 136)
• This item cannot be set when "MultEQ® XT32" in the menu is set to "Off".

■ Reference Level Offset

Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® is referenced to the standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard. Recommended setting levels for content are shown below.

0 dB (Film Reference) (Default):	Optimized for content such as movies.
5 dB :	Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as classical music.
10 dB :	Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference.
15 dB :	Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range.

- Setting is enabled when "Dynamic EQ" is "On". (19) p. 194

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

194

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Dynamic Volume

Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV, movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user's preferred volume setting.

Works with MultEQ ^® XT32.

Heavy:	Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds.
Medium:	Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound.
Light:	Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
Off(Default):	Do not use “Dynamic Volume”.

• If "Dynamic Volume" is set to "Yes" in "Audyssey® Setup", the setting is automatically changed to "Medium". (12 p. 219)
• This item cannot be set when "MultEQ® XT32" in the menu is set to "Off".

Audyssey LFC™

Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from being conveyed to neighboring rooms.

Works with MultEQ® XT32.

On: Use "Audyssey LFC™".

Off

(Default):

Do not use "Audyssey LFC™".

- This item cannot be set when "MultEQ® XT32" in the menu is set to "Off".

■ Containment Amount

Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings if you have close neighbors.

1 - 7 (Default : 4)

- This can be set when "Audyssey LFC™" in the menu is set to "On".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

195

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Graphic EQ

Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.

• Speakers for which "Graphic EQ" can be set differ according to the sound mode.
• This can be set when "MultEQ® XT32" setting is "Off". (19) p. 193
• This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct".
• If you are using headphones, you can set the equalizer for headphones. (p. 196)

■ Graphic EQ / Headphone EQ

Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not.

On:	Use the graphic equalizer.
Off(Default):	Do not use the graphic equalizer.

- "Headphone EQ" is set in the menu when headphones are used.

■ Speaker Selection

Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all speakers.

All: Adjust all speaker tones together.

Left/Right(Default):

Adjust the left and right speaker tones together.

Each: Adjust the tone for each speaker.

■ Adjust EQ

Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band.

1. Select the speaker.
2. Select the adjustment frequency band. 63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz / 16 kHz
3. Adjust the level. -20.0 dB - +6.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

- Front Dolby, Surround Dolby and Back Dolby speakers can only be set when 63 Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

196

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Curve Copy

Copy the Flat correction curve created in Audyssey ^® Setup.

• "Curve Copy" is displayed after Audyssey® Setup has been performed.
• "Curve Copy" cannot be used when using headphones.

Set Defaults

The "Graphic EQ" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

197

Video

Make video-related settings.

Picture Adjust

Picture quality can be adjusted.

• This can be set when the "Video Conversion" setting is "On". (1 p. 206)
• This can be set when "HDMI", "COMP" or "VIDEO" is assigned for each input source. (17 p. 215)
• "Contrast", "Brightness", "Saturation", "Noise Reduction" and "Enhancer" can be set when "Picture Mode" is set to "Custom". (198)
• "Picture Adjust" settings are stored for each input source.
• "Picture Adjust" cannot be set when 4K or 8K signals are input.
• "Picture Adjust" cannot be set when sound mode is set to "IMAX DTS" or "IMAX DTS:X".

Picture Mode

Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and your viewing environment.

Standard:	The standard mode suited for most living room viewing environments.
Movie:	A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as a theater room.
Vivid:	A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter and more vivid.
Streaming:	A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
ISF Day:	A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room during the day.
ISF Night:	A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at night.
Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.
Off(Default):	No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

198

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

• The two special adjustment modes, "ISF Day" and "ISF Night", should be used by a certified technician to adjust the color calibration to match the installation conditions.
  We recommend that the settings and adjustments be carried out by an ISF-certified technician.
• These settings can also be configured using "Picture Mode" in the option menu. (12 p. 198)

Contrast

Adjust picture contrast.

$$ - 5 0 - + 5 0 (\text { Default }: 0) $$

Brightness

Adjust picture brightness.

$$ - 5 0 - + 5 0 (\text { Default }: 0) $$

Saturation

Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation).

$$ - 5 0 - + 5 0 (\text { D e f a u l t }: 0) $$

Noise Reduction

Reduce overall video noise.

Low / Medium / High / Off (Default : Off)

■ Enhancer

Emphasize picture sharpness.

$$ 0 - + 1 2 (\text {Default:} 0) $$

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

199

HDMI Setup

Make settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings.

NOTE

- When "HDMI Pass Through" and "HDMI Control" is set to "On", it consumes more standby power. ("HDMI Pass Through" (127) p. 200), "HDMI Control" (127) p. 202)) If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

■ HDMI Audio Out

Select HDMI audio output device.

AVR(Default):	Play back through speakers connected to the unit.
TV:	Play back through TV connected to the unit.

• When the HDMI Control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio setting. (r.p. 156)
• When the power of this unit is on and "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV", audio is output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.

■ HDMI Pass Through

Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in standby power mode.

On(Default):	Transmits the selected HDMI input through this unit's HDMI output when this unit is in standby power mode.
Off:	No HDMI signals are transmitted through this unit's HDMI output in standby power mode.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

200

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Pass Through Source

Sets the HDMI connector that inputs HDMI signals when in standby.

Last:	The most recently used input source will go into standby mode.
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Media Player / Game / AUX / 8K / TV Audio / CD* (Default : CBL/SAT):	Pass through the selected input source.

*“Pass Through Source” can be set when any of the HDMI connectors is assigned to “CD” for the input source in the “Input Assign” setting. (12) p. 214)

- "Pass Through Source" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On" or "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On". ("HDMI Pass Through" (p. 200), "HDMI Control" (p. 202))

■ RC Source Select

Set whether to allow this unit to be turned on by the input source select button on the remote control when this unit is on standby.

Power On + Source (Default):	The power of this unit is turned on and the input source changes.
Source Select Only:	The HDMI input source changes while this unit is on standby. The power display of this unit blinks when the input source select button of the remote control is pressed.

- "RC Source Select" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On" or "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On". ("HDMI Pass Through" (12 p. 200), "HDMI Control" (12 p. 202))

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

201

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

HDMI Control

You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and compatible with HDMI Control.

On: Use HDMI Control function.

Off

(Default):

Do not use HDMI Control function.

• If using the HDMI Control function, connect a TV compatible with HDMI control to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector.
• Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check the settings.
• Refer to "HDMI Control function" for more information about the HDMI Control function. (1 p. 156)

NOTE

- If the "HDMI Control" settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.

ARC

On the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector, set whether to receive sound from the TV via HDMI.

On: Use ARC function.

Off

(Default):

Do not use ARC function.

• You can adjust the volume of this unit using the TV remote control.
• If using this function, use a TV compatible with ARC (Audio Return Channel) and enable the HDMI Control function of the TV.
• When "HDMI Control" is set to "On", the "ARC" settings automatically switch "On". (125 p. 202)

NOTE

• If the "ARC" settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.
• Using an eARC function-compatible television enables audio playback from the speaker connected to this unit, regardless of "ARC" settings in the menu.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

202

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

TV Audio Switching

Sets automatic switching to the "TV Audio" input when a TV connected via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to this unit.

On(Default):	Select the “TV Audio” input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.
Off:	Do not select the “TV Audio” input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.

- "TV Audio Switching" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (12 p. 202)

Power Off Control

Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.

All(Default):	If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
Video:	With an input source being selected that is assigned either “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO”, when you turn the power of the TV off, power to this unit is automatically set to standby. (ICP p. 215)

Off: This unit does not link with power to a TV.

- "Power Off Control" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (127 p. 202)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

203

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Power Saving

If "TV Speaker" is set as the audio output setting of your TV, this unit is automatically set to standby mode to reduce power consumption.

This function is activated in the following cases.

• When "TV Audio" is selected as the input source of this unit
• When playing content from a device connected by HDMI

On: Use Power Saving function.

Off

(Default):

Do not use Power Saving function.

- "Power Saving" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (☐ p. 202)

Smart Menu

This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV remote control.

On: Use Smart Menu function.

Off: Do not use Smart Menu function.

- "Smart Menu" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (图 2 p. 202)

NOTE

• If the "Smart Menu" settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.
• The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the specifications of your TV. In this case, set "Smart Menu" to "Off".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

204

Output Settings

Makes settings for video output.

• This can be set when "HDMI", "COMP" or "VIDEO" is assigned for each input source. (1 p. 215)
• "Resolution", "Sharpness", "Progressive Mode" and "Aspect Ratio" can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". ("Resolution" (p. 207), "Sharpness" (p. 207), "Progressive Mode" (p. 208), "Aspect Ratio" (p. 208))
• "Output Settings" cannot be set when 4K or 8K signals are input.
• "Video Mode", "i/p Scaler", "Resolution", "Sharpness", "Progressive Mode" and "Aspect Ratio" cannot be set when sound mode is set to "IMAX DTS" or "IMAX DTS:X". ("Video Mode" (p. 206), "i/p Scaler" (p. 206), "Resolution" (p. 207), "Sharpness" (p. 207), "Progressive Mode" (p. 208), "Aspect Ratio" (p. 208))
• "Video Conversion", "Video Mode", "i/p Scaler", "Resolution", "Sharpness", "Progressive Mode" and "Aspect Ratio" settings are stored for each input source. ("Video Conversion" (p. 206), "Video Mode" (p. 206), "i/p Scaler" (p. 206), "Resolution" (p. 207), "Sharpness" (p. 207), "Progressive Mode" (p. 208), "Aspect Ratio" (p. 208))

■ HDMI Video Output

Select the HDMI monitor connector to be used.

Auto(Dual)(Default):	The presence of a TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 or HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is detected automatically, and that TV connection is used.
Monitor 1:	A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector is always used.
Monitor 2:	A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is always used.

• If both the HDMI MONITOR 1 and HDMI MONITOR 2 connectors are connected and "Resolution" is set to "Auto", the signals are output with a resolution that is compatible with both TVs. (IT p. 207) When the "Resolution" setting in the menu is not set to "Auto", set the resolution in "Video" - "HDMI Monitor 1" and "HDMI Monitor 2" to one that compatible with both TVs. (IT p. 271)
• You can check which resolutions are compatible with your TV in "HDMI Monitor 1" and "HDMI Monitor 2". (1 p. 271)
• When connecting multiple Dolby Vision TVs, the signal will only be optimal for one TV. A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector has priority.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

205

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Video Mode

Configure the video processing method to match the type of video content.

Auto(Default):	Process video automatically based on the HDMI content information.
Game:	Always process video for game content.Minimize the video delay when the video is delayed compared to the button operations on the controller of the game console.
Movie:	Perform image processing that is suitable for contents other than games.

- If "Video Mode" is set to "Auto", the mode is switched according to the input contents.

■ Video Conversion

The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with the connected TV. (17 p. 314)

On(Default):	The input video signal is converted.
Off: The input video signal is not converted.

■ i/p Scaler

Set the video input signal to be subjected to i/p Scaler processing. i/p Scaler will convert the resolution of the input video signal to the value set in "Resolution". (1 p. 207)

Analog(Default):	Use i/p (interlace-to-progressive) scaler function for analog video signals.
Analog & HDMI:	Use i/p Scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal.
HDMI:	Use i/p Scaler function for HDMI video signals.
Off: Do not use i/p Scaler function.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

206

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Resolution

Set the output resolution. You can set "Resolution" separately for HDMI output of the analog video input and HDMI input.

Auto(Default):	The resolution supported by the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT connector is detected automatically and the appropriate output resolution is set.
480p/576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 4K / 8K :	Set the output resolution.

• When "i/p Scaler" is set to "Analog & HDMI", the resolution of both the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set. (P. 206)
• For the detail of upscaling, please refer to "Video conversion function" (p. 315).

Sharpness

Enables the sharpness feature which enhances the edges of images when up-scaling video to 4K or 8K.

On:	Enables the video enhancer sharpness feature to provide image edge contouring which is optimized for converting lower resolution standard definition video to 4K or 8K.
Off (Default):	Disables the video enhancer sharpness feature.

• This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". (12 p. 206)
• We recommend using this sharpness feature only when your TV sharpness is set to 0.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

207

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Progressive Mode

Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video signal.

Auto(Default):	The video signal is automatically detected and the appropriate mode is set.
Video: Select mode suitable for video playback.
Video and Film:	Select mode suitable for video and 30-frame film material playback.

- This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". (17 p. 206)

■ Aspect Ratio

Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI.

16:9(Default):	Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
4:3 :	Output at 4:3 aspect ratio with black bars on the sides of a 16:9 TV screen. (except for 480p/576p output)

- This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". (127 p. 206)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

208

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Component Video Out
Set the zone to which the component video output connector is assigned.

MAIN ZONE(Default):	Assigns the component video output connector to MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2:	Assigns the component video output connector to ZONE2.

On Screen Display

Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.

Volume

Sets where to display the volume level.

Bottom

(Default):

Display at the bottom.

Top: Display at the top.

Off: Turn display off.

- When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text (closed captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to "Top".

Info

Displays status of operation temporarily when the input source is switched.

On

Turn display on.

(Default):

Off: Turn display off.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

209

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Now Playing

Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is "HEOS Music" or "Tuner".

Always On (Default):	Show display continuously.
Auto Off:	Show display for 30 seconds after operation.

Screen Saver

Select the screen saver setting.

A screen saver is activated if no operation is performed for more than 5 minutes when no video signal is input or when the same screen (e.g. the setup menu) is displayed.

Use △▽◀▷ to clear the screen saver.

On: Turns screen saver on.

Off

(Default):

Turns screen saver off.

- The screen saver is activated in the following cases.

• When the setup menu is displayed
• When no video signal is input
• When the network, USB, Bluetooth or Tuner playback screen is displayed
• This feature will be supported via firmware update.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

210

4K/8K Signal Format

Set the format of 4K and 8K signal to be played back by this unit when the TV or playback device connected to this unit is HDMI 4K or 8K signal compatible.

4K/8K Signal Format

Set the format of 4K and 8K signal played back by this unit.

Standard:	Select if your TV and playback devices support 4K 60p 4:2:0 8 bit video signals.
Enhanced (Default):	Select if your TV, playback devices, and cables support high quality 4K 60p 4:4:4 8 bit, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 10 bit video signals.
8K Enhanced:	Select if your TV, playback devices, and cables support high quality 8K 60p or 4K 120p video signals.

【Relation between the "4K/8K Signal Format" setting and supported resolutions】

Support Resolution	Color Space	Pixel Depth	4K/8K Signal Format
			Standard Enhanced		8K Enhanced
4K 24p, 4K 30p, 4K 25p	RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4	8 bit	√ √	√
		10,12 bit -		√	√
	YCbCr 4:2:2 1	2 bit	√ √	√
4K 60p, 4K 50p	YCbCr 4:2:0	8 bit	√ √	√
		10,12 bit -		√	√
	RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4	8 bit -		√	√
		10,12 bit -			√
	YCbCr 4:2:2 1	2 bit -		√	√
4K 120p, 4K 100p	YCbCr 4:2:0	8,10,12 bit	-	-	√
	RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4	8,10 bit -			√
	YCbCr 4:2:2 1	2 bit -			√
8K 24p, 8K 30p, 8K 25p	YCbCr 4:2:0	8,10,12 bit	-	-	√
	RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4	8,10 bit -			√
	YCbCr 4:2:2 1	2 bit -			√
8K 60p, 8K 50p	YCbCr 4:2:0 8	10 bit -			√

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

211

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

• When setting this to "Enhanced", we recommend using a "Premium High Speed HDMI Cable" or "Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet" that has an "HDMI Premium Certified Cable" label attached to the product package.
• When setting this to "8K Enhanced", we recommend using an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable".
• When this setting is "Enhanced" or "8K Enhanced", configure the television or playback device settings to match this setting.
• When this setting is "Enhanced" or "8K Enhanced", video may not be output correctly depending on the connected playback device or HDMI cable. In this case, change this setting to "Standard".
• "Custom" is displayed for the setting item if our service engineers or custom installers has configured the HDMI signal format for this unit.
• "4K/8K Signal Format" can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the setting.
• Press and hold the main unit's STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same time for at least 3 seconds.
  "*Video Format " appears on the display.
• Press on the main unit.
  "4K/8K Format " appears on the display.
• Use or on the main unit to select the 4K/8K Signal Format.
• Press the main unit's ENTER to complete the setting.

HDCP Setup

Sets the HDCP version for each HDMI input source.

Video may not be output depending on the HDCP version of your player and the TV.

If this issue occurs, use this setting to set one version of HDCP. This may be able to output video.

Auto (Default): Automatically applies the HDCP version of this unit according to TV.

1.4: Fixes the HDCP version of this unit to 1.4.
2.3: Fixes the HDCP version of this unit to 2.3.

- "Custom" is displayed for the setting item if our service engineers or custom installers has configured the HDCP version for this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

212

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

TV Format

Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.

Format

NTSC

(Default):

Select NTSC output.

PAL: Select PAL output.

• "Format" can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Following the display content to make the setting.
• Press and hold the main unit's STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same time for at least 3 seconds.
  "*Video Format " appears on the display.
• Use the main unit's ◀ or ▷ and set the video signal format.
• Press the main unit's ENTER to complete the setting.

NOTE

- When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the picture will not be displayed properly.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

213

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Inputs

Perform settings related to input source playback.

You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.

Input Assign

By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a connected device.

Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio input connector, analog audio input connector, component video input connector and video input connector when connecting an input source that differs from that printed to the audio/video input connectors of this unit.

Sets the audio input mode for each "INPUT MODE" source. "AUTO" is normally recommended for this setting. This automatically detects and plays signal input to this unit prioritized in the following order: HDMI > DIGITAL > ANALOG.

- By default, each item is set as follows.

Input source	Input connector				INPUT MODE
	HDMI DIGITAL		ANALOG	VIDEO
CBL/SAT 1 COA	X1 1 VIDEO	1 AUTO
DVD 2 COAX2 2	COMP1 AUTO
Blu-ray 3	-	3 VIDEO2 AUTO
Media Player	4	OPT2	- COMP2 AUTO
Game	5	-	4 VIDEO3 AUTO
AUX	FRONT	-	-	-	HDMI
8K	7(8K)	-	-	-	HDMI
TV Audio	-	OPT1	-	-	DIGITAL
CD	-	-	5	-	ANALOG

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

214

Remote

Index

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

☐ TV set top box/satellite users please note

When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box: To play the video signal assigned to "HDMI" combined with the audio signal assigned at "Input Assign" - "DIGITAL", you will also need to select "DIGITAL" in the "INPUT MODE".

- The same input connector can be assigned to multiple input sources. For example, assign the same HDMI input connector to multiple sources to use each input source in combination with analog or digital audio as you prefer. In such cases, set the audio connector for playback in "INPUT MODE".

HDMI

Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input sources.

1/2/3/4/5/6/7(8K)/FRONT:	Assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.
- :	Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.

• Only "HDMI7" can be assigned to the "8K" input source.
• When "HDMI Control" or "ARC" is set to "On" in the menu, "HDMI" cannot be assigned to "TV Audio". ("HDMI Control" (1 p. 202), "ARC" (1 p. 202))
• The eARC function does not operate when "HDMI" is set as the "TV Audio" input source.

DIGITAL

Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the input sources.

COAX1 (Coaxial) / COAX2 / OPT1 (Optical) / OPT2:	Assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.
- :	Do not assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.

ANALOG

Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the input sources.

1/2/3/4/5:	Assign a analog audio input connector to the selected input source.
-:	Do not assign a analog audio input connector to the selected input source.

VIDEO

Set this to change the component video input connectors and composite video input connectors assigned to the input sources.

COMP1 (Component video) / COMP2 /VIDEO1 / VIDEO2 /VIDEO3:	Assign the video input connector to the selected input source.
- :	Do not assign a video input connector to the selected input source.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

215

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ INPUT MODE

Set the audio input modes for each input source.

It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to "AUTO".

AUTO(Default):

Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.

HDMI: Play only signals from HDMI input.

DIGITAL: Play only signals from digital audio input.

ANALOG: Play only signals from analog audio input.

• When digital signals are properly input, the DIG. indicator lights on the display. If the DIG. indicator does not light, check "Input Assign" and the connections. (127 p. 214)
• If "HDMI Control" is set to "On" and a TV compatible with the ARC is connected via the HDMI MONITOR 1 connectors, the input mode whose input source is "TV Audio" is fixed to ARC.
• When an eARC function-compatible television is connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector, the input mode whose input source is "TV Audio" is fixed to eARC.

Set Defaults

The "Input Assign" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

216

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Source Rename

• Changes the display name of the input source. Once changed, the name is displayed on the display and menu screens of this unit.
• If the device name can be acquired from a connected HDMI device, the display name is changed automatically.
  Use this function to change names as needed when the device you are using differs from the input source on this unit.

CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Media Player / Game / AUX / 8K / TV Audio / CD / Phono:	Change the display name for input source.
Set Defaults:	The “Source Rename” settings are returned to the default settings.

Hide Sources

Remove from the display input sources that are not used.

Show

Use this source.

(Default):

Hide: Do not use this source.

- Up to 16 characters can be input.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

217

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Source Level

This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source's audio input.

Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.

Source Level

☐ When the input source is set to "HEOS Music" or "Tuner"

-12 dB - +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

■ Analog Inputs / Digital Inputs

☐ When the input source is set other than to "HEOS Music" or "Tuner"

-12dB - +12dB (Default : 0dB)

• The analog input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which "ANALOG" is assigned at "Input Assign". (12) p. 214
• The digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which "DIGITAL" is assigned at "Input Assign". (P) p. 214
• "Source Level" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

218

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Speakers

The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called "Audyssey® Setup".

You do not have to perform Audyssey ^® Setup when you have already performed “Speaker Calibration” in “Setup Assistant”.

To set up the speakers manually, use "Manual Setup" on the menu. (☐ p. 230)

Audyssey® Setup

To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight positions).

When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound calibration microphone within 2 ft (60 cm) of the first measurement position (main listening position).

- If you perform Audyssey® Setup, Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™ functions are enabled. (E7 p. 193)

FL Front speaker (L)

FR Front speaker (R)

C Center speaker

SW Subwoofer

SL Surround speaker (L)

SR Surround speaker (R)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

219

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ About the main listening position

The main listening position is the position where listeners would normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment. Before starting Audyssey® Setup, place the Sound calibration microphone in the main listening position.

Audyssey MultEQ ^® XT32 uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.

■ About Audyssey Sub EQ HT™

Audyssey Sub EQ HT ^™ makes the integration of dual subwoofers seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ ^® XT32 to both subwoofers together.

To run Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ you must select "Measure (2 spkrs)" in "Channel Select". (p. 222).

NOTE

• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices (radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.
• During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room. Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
• Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the Sound calibration microphone at least 20 inches (50 cm) away from the wall. Failure to do so will result in inaccurate readings.
• During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.
• Operating VOLUME ▲▼ on the remote control unit or MASTER VOLUME on the main unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
• Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones before performing Audyssey® Setup.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

220

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup)

graph TD
    A["Preparation"] --> B["Measurement"]
    B --> C["Calculation & Store"]
    C --> D["Check"]
    D --> E["Finish"]

1 Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it at the main listening position.

When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.

2 If using a subwoofer capable of the following adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.

☐ When using a subwoofer with a direct mode

Set the direct mode to "On" and disable the volume adjustment and crossover frequency setting.

☐ When using a subwoofer without a direct mode

Make the following settings:

• Volume : 12 o'clock position
• Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency
- Low pass filter : Off
- Standby mode : Off

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

221

3 Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

4 Select "Start", then press ENTER.

Audyssey ^® Setup can also make the following settings.

- Amp Assign

The signals output from the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 speaker terminals can be switched in accordance with your speaker environment. ("Amp Assign" (127 p. 230))

- Channel Select

If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring time can be reduced. You can also change the number of surround back speakers and subwoofer.

- Dolby Speaker Setup

Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling.

This can be set when using the Front Dolby Atmos Enabled, Surround Dolby Atmos Enabled or Back Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker.

5 Follow the instructions on the screen display and press "Next" to proceed further.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

222

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

6 When the following screen is displayed, select "Begin Test" and then press ENTER.

Start the measurement of the first position.

• Measurement requires several minutes.

NOTE

- If "Caution!" is displayed on TV screen:

• Go to "Error messages" (p. 227). Check any related items, and perform the necessary procedures.
• If the volume level for the subwoofer is not appropriate, an error message is displayed. See "Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust" (tF p. 228).

7 When the detected speaker is displayed, select "Next" and then press ENTER.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

223

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

8 Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2, select "Continue", then press ENTER.

The measurement of the second position starts.

Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.

□ Stopping Audyssey® Setup

① Press BACK to display the popup screen.
② Press ◀ to select "Yes", then press ENTER.

9 Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 8.

- To skip measuring the fourth and subsequent listening position, press ◀ to select "Complete" and press ENTER to proceed to step 11.

10 Select "Continue", then press ENTER.

Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results.

- Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The more speakers and measurement positions that there are, the more time it takes to perform the analysis.

NOTE

- When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is not turned off.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

224

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

11 Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume ^® .

The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the settings as preferred.

• Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so that sound can be heard even at low volume.
  This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of the night.
• Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit. Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example, the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during television programs.

12 When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit and then press "Next".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

225

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

• When performing Audyssey® Setup for the first time, the measurement data is automatically saved to "Preset 1" of "Speaker Preset".
• If Audyssey® Setup has already been performed, the following "Speaker Preset" selection screen is displayed.

- See "Speaker Preset" for detailed information on the Speaker Preset function. (1 p. 250)

13 Select "Details" and press ENTER to verify the measurement results.

- Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in subwoofers.

NOTE

- Do not enable new speakers in speaker configuration menu after Audyssey® Setup. If it is changed, run Audyssey® Setup again in order to configure the optimum equalizer settings.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

226

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Error messages

An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.

Examples Error details	Measures
No speakers found.	Sound calibration microphone is not detected.Not all speakers could be detected.	Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.Check the speaker connections.
Ambient noise is too high or level is too low	There is too much noise in the room.Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low.	Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing.Adjust the subwoofer's volume.
Front R : None	The displayed speaker could not be detected.	Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
Front R : Phase	The displayed speaker is connected with the polarity reversed.	Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the connection is correct, press to select “Ignore”, then press ENTER.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

227

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust

The optimal level of each subwoofer channel for Audyssey® Setup measurement is 75 dB.

During subwoofer level measurement, an error message is displayed when one level of subwoofers is outside the 72 - 78 dB range.

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.

[Error message]

1 Select "SW Level Matching" and then press ENTER.

2 Adjust the volume control on your subwoofer so that the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.

3 When the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range, select "Next" and then press ENTER.

- If you use two subwoofers, the second subwoofer's adjustment will be started. Repeat the operation from step 2, 3.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

228

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings

If you set "Restore..." to "Restore", you can return to Audyssey® Setup measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT32) even when you have changed each setting manually.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

229

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Manual Setup

Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey® Setup.

• If you enable new speakers in the speaker configuration menu after performing Audyssey® Setup, you will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ® or Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. (p. 193)
• Changing the following settings: Speaker size (Large or Small) / Distances / Levels / Crossovers settings will not disable Audyssey® or require running Audyssey® Setup again.
• "Manual Setup" can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.

Amp Assign

Select the power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system.

Assign Mode

Select how to use the power amp.

You need to configure the detailed settings for the speaker configuration in accordance with the selected mode. Select Assign Mode configure the corresponding detailed settings.

11.1ch:

- Setting to use the 9-channel power amplifier in this unit and an external power amplifier connected to PRE OUT to play back up to 11.1-channels.

- You can connect speakers for up to 11.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

230

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

9.1ch:	Settings to assign all power amplifier within this unit to MAIN ZONE to play back up to 9.1-channels.You can connect speakers for up to 11.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 9.1-channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.
7.1ch + ZONE2(Default):	Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 to 2-channels.You can connect speakers for up to 9.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.

7.1ch + ZONE3:	Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE3 to 2-channelsYou can connect speakers for up to 9.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.
5.1ch + ZONE2/3:	Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit for ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to two different channel.
7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO:	Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to a different channel.You can connect speakers for up to 9.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

231

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

7.1ch (Bi-Amp):	Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.You can connect speakers for up to 9.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.
5.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2:	Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 to 2-channels.

7.1ch + Front B:

Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit for connecting the second set of front speakers.You can switch between the desired combination of front speakers A and front speakers B.Switch the front speaker using the “Front Speaker” setting. (p. 247)You can connect speakers for up to 9.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.

Pre Amplifier:

All of the speakers are connected using an external power amplifier and this unit is used as a pre amplifier.

- When "Assign Mode" is set to "7.1ch + ZONE2", "7.1ch (Bi-Amp)" or "7.1ch + Front B" in the menu, the assigned channels are output from HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.

- When Assign Mode is set to "5.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2" in the menu, the front channels for Bi-Amp connection are output from HEIGHT1 speaker terminals, and the ZONE2 channels are output from HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

232

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Floor

Select the floor speakers location.

5ch & SB(Default):	This layout combines a surround back speaker with the basic 5-channel layout.
5ch:	This is a basic 5-channel layout that uses front speakers, center speakers and surround speakers.

Height

Height Sp

Select the number of the height speakers and ceiling speakers used in MAIN ZONE.

None: Uses no height and ceiling speakers.

2ch(Default):	Uses a set of (two) height speakers or ceiling speakers.
4ch:	Uses two sets of (four) height speakers or ceiling speakers.
5ch:	Uses five height speakers *

* If "5ch" is selected, connect the Top Surround speaker to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.

Dolby Sp

Select the number of the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers used in MAIN ZONE.

None (Default):	Uses no Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
2ch:	Uses a set of (two) Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
4ch:	Uses two sets of (four) Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

233

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Layout

Select the height, ceiling, or Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker location.

The layouts that can be selected differ depending on the combinations of "Assign Mode" and "Floor" in the menu. ("Assign Mode" (p. 230), "Floor" (p. 233))

Settings AUDIO OUT connectors
Height Sp Dolby	Sp NOTE Layout HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2
None None - -
2ch None			Front Height (Default) Front Height -
			Top Front Top Front -
			Top Middle Top Middle	-
			Top Rear	Top Rear	-
			Rear Height	Rear Height	-
4ch None		*1	Front Height & Top Middle	Front Height	Top Middle
			Front Height & Top Rear	Front Height	Top Rear
			Front Height & Rear Height*2	Front Height	Rear Height
			Front Height & Surr. Height	Front Height	Surr. Height
			Top Front & Top Rear Top Front	Top Rear
			Top Front & Rear Height Top Front	Rear Height
			Top Middle & Rear Height	Top Middle	Rear Height
None 2ch			Front Dolby	Front Dolby	-
			Surround Dolby Surround Dolby	-
			Back Dolby*3	Back Dolby	-

*1 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch" or "9.1ch" in the menu.
*2 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
*3 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch" or "9.1ch" and "Floor" is set to "5ch & SB" in the menu.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

234

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Settings AUDIO OUT connectors
Height Sp Dolby	Sp NOTE Layout HEIGHT 1	HEIGHT 2
2ch 2ch		*1	Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear
			Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height
			Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby
			Front Height & Back Dolby*4	Front Height Back	Dolby
			Top Front & Surr. Dolby Top Front	Surround Dolby
			Top Front & Back Dolby *4	Top Front Back Dolby
None 4ch		*1	Front Dolby & Surr. Dolby	Front Dolby	Surround Dolby
			Front Dolby & Back Dolby*4	Front Dolby	Back Dolby

*1 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch" or "9.1ch" in the menu.

*4 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch" and "Floor" is set to "5ch & SB" in the menu.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

235

Remote

Index

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Settings AUDIO OUT connectors
Height Sp Dolby Sp NOTE Layout		HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 SUBWOOFER2
5ch None		*5	Front Height & Surr. Height Front Height Surr. Height Top Surround
			Front Height & Rear Height *2	Front Height Rear Height Top Surround

*2 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

*5 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch" in the menu.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

236

Remote

Index

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Pre-out

When "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch", selects the PRE OUT connector the external power amplifier used in MAIN ZONE.

The PRE OUT connectors that can be selected differ depending on the combination of "Floor" and "Height" - "Layout" settings configured in the menu.

This can be set when "5ch & SB" is set for "Floor" in the menu and four or more Height and Dolby speakers in total are used.

HEIGHT 2* (Default):	The Height2 left and right pre-amplifier outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
Front:	The Front left and right pre-amplifier outputs are connected to an external amplifier.

* The name of the speaker is displayed that is set for the HEIGHT 2 speaker terminals by the "Height" - "Layout" setting in the menu.

■ View Terminal Config.

This shows how to connect the speaker terminals and PRE OUT connectors for your "Amp Assign" setting on the menu screen.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

237

Speaker Config.

Select whether or not speakers are present, playback capacity for low bass frequencies and speaker size.

- When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in "Amp Assign" are set to "None", "None" is automatically set for Height2.

Front

Set the front speaker size.

Large(Default):	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small:	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

• When "Subwoofer" is set to "No", "Front" is automatically set to "Large".
• When "Front" is set to "Small", you cannot set speakers other than "Front" to "Large".

Center

Set the presence and size of the center speaker.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when a center speaker is not connected.

Subwoofer

Set the presence of a subwoofer.

2 spkrs:	Use two subwoofers.
1 spkr(Default):	Use only one subwoofer.
None:	Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

- When "Subwoofer" is set to "None" and you set "Front" to "Small", "Subwoofer" is automatically set to "1 spkr".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

238

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Surround

Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small(Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the surround speakers are not connected.

- When "Surround" is set to "None", "Surr. Back", "Surround Dolby" and "Back Dolby" are automatically set to "None".

■ Surr. Back

Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.

2 spkrs(Default):	Use two surround back speakers.
1 spkr:	Use only one surround back speaker.Connect to the L terminal to SURROUND BACK when this setting is selected.

- When "Surr. Back" is set to "None" or "1 spkr", "Back Dolby" is automatically set to "None".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

239

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Front Height

Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small(Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the front height speakers are not connected.

Front Dolby

Set the presence and size of the front Dolby speakers.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the front Dolby speakers are not connected.

Top Front

Set the presence and size of the top front speakers.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the top front speakers are not connected.

Top Middle

Set the presence and size of the top middle speakers.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the top middle speakers are not connected.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

240

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Surround Dolby

Set the presence and size of the surround Dolby speakers.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small(Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the surround Dolby speakers are not connected.

Top Rear

Set the presence and size of the top rear speakers.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the top rear speakers are not connected.

■ Surr. Height

Set the presence and size of the surround height speakers.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the surround height speakers are not connected.

- When "Front Height" is set to "None", "Surr. Height" is automatically set to "None".

■ Rear Height

Set the presence and size of the rear height speakers.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the rear height speakers are not connected.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

241

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Back Dolby

Set the presence and size of the back Dolby speakers.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small(Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the back Dolby speakers are not connected.

- When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in "Amp Assign" are set to "None", "None" is automatically set for Height2.

■ Top Surround

Set the presence and size of the top surround speaker.

Large:	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small (Default):	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
None:	Select when the top surround speaker is not connected.

- When "Surr. Height" or "Rear Height" is set to "None", "Top Surround" is automatically set to "None".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

242

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Distances

Set distance from listening position to speakers.

Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each speaker.

Unit

Set the unit of distance.

Feet (Default)

Meters

Step

Set the minimum variable width of the distance.

1 ft / 0.1 ft (Default: 1 ft)

0.1 m / 0.01 m

■ Set the distance

0.0 ft - 60.0 ft / 0.00 m - 18.00 m

• The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the "Amp Assign" and "Speaker Config." settings. ("Amp Assign" (p. 230), "Speaker Config." (p. 238))
• Default settings: Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / Center / Front Dolby L / Front Dolby R / Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2: 12.0 ft (3.60 m) Speakers other than the above: 10.0 ft (3.00 m)
• Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft (6.00 m).

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

243

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Dolby Speaker Setup

Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling.

3.0 ft - 11.0 ft / 0.90 m - 3.30 m (Default: 6.0 ft / 1.80 m)

- This can be set when "Front Dolby", "Surround Dolby" or "Back Dolby" is set to "Large" or "Small" in "Speaker Config.".

Set Defaults

The "Distances" settings are returned to the default settings.

Levels

Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position when it is output from each speaker.

■ Test Tone Start

A test tone is output from the selected speaker.

While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the selected speaker.

-12.0 dB - +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

• The set "Levels" are reflected in all sound modes.
• If you wish to adjust the channel level for each input source, carry out the settings in "Channel Level Adjust". (17 p. 135)
• When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you cannot set "Levels".

Set Defaults

The "Levels" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

244

Crossovers

Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.

■ Speaker Selection

Selects how to set the crossover frequency.

All(Default):	Sets the same crossover frequency for all speakers.
Individual:	Selects the crossover points for each speaker individually.

■ Set the crossover frequency

40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)

• "Crossovers" can be set when the "Subwoofer Mode" setting is "LFE+Main", or when you have a speaker that is set to "Small". (12) p. 246
• The default crossover frequency is "80 Hz", which will work best with the widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to "250 Hz" when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz – 20 kHz.
• Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the speakers set in "Small". This cut off bass frequency is output from the subwoofer or front speakers.
• The speakers that can be set when "Individual" is selected differ depending on to the "Subwoofer Mode" setting. (12 p. 246)

- When "LFE" is selected, speakers set to "Small" at "Speaker Config." can be set. If the speakers are set to "Large", "Full Band" is displayed and the setting cannot be made. (p. 238)

- When "LFE+Main" is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the "Speaker Config." setting. (195 p. 238)

- The audio settings in "IMAX Audio Settings" are applied during IMAX playback. (p. 186)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

245

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Bass

Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.

Subwoofer Mode

Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.

LFE(Default):	The low range signal of the channel set to “Small” speaker size is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
LFE+Main:	The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

• "Subwoofer Mode" can be set when "Speaker Config." - "Subwoofer" in the menu is set to other than "None". (127 p. 238)
• Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
• If "Speaker Config." - "Front" and "Center" are set to "Large", and "Subwoofer Mode" is set to "LFE", no sound may be output from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. (12) p. 238) Select "LFE+Main" if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.
• The audio settings in "IMAX Audio Settings" are applied during IMAX playback. (r ^2 p. 186)

LPF for LFE

Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer.

80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 120 Hz)

- The audio settings in "IMAX Audio Settings" are applied during IMAX playback. (p. 186)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

246

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Front Speaker

Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode.

A

Front speaker A is used.

(Default):

B : Front speaker B is used.

A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.

- This can be set when "Assign Mode" is set to "7.1ch + Front B". (☐ p. 232)

2ch Playback

Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct and stereo playback modes.

Setting

Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct and stereo playback modes.

Auto(Default):	The settings in “Speakers” are applied.(p. 219)
Manual:	Set the speakers for 2-channel playback.Make the following settings:

Front

Set the size of the front speakers for 2-channel playback.

Large(Default):	Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Small:	Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

- When "Speaker Config." - "Subwoofer" in the menu is set to "None", "Large" is automatically set. (p. 238)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

247

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Subwoofer

Set the presence of a subwoofer.

Yes(Default):	Use a subwoofer.
No:	Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

• When "Speaker Config." - "Subwoofer" in the menu is set to "None", No is automatically set. (1 p. 238) If the "Front" setting is "Small", the setting is automatically "Yes".

SW Mode

Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.

LFE(Default):	When “2ch Playback” - “Front” is set to “Large”, only LFE signals are output from the subwoofer. Also, when “2ch Playback” - “Front” is set to “Small”, the front channel low range signals are added to the LFE signals and output from the subwoofer.
LFE+Main:	The front channel low range signal is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

- This can be set when "2ch Playback" - "Subwoofer" is set to "Yes".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

248

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Crossover

Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each channel to the subwoofer.

40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)

• This can be set when "2ch Playback" - "Subwoofer" is set to "Yes".
• When "2ch Playback" - "Front" is set to "Large" and "SW Mode" is set to "LFE", "Full Band" is displayed and this cannot be set.

■ Distance FL / Distance FR

Set distance from main listening position to speaker.

0.0 ft - 60.0 ft (Default: 12.0 ft) / 0.00 m - 18.00 m (Default: 3.60 m)

- Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft (6.00 m).

Level FL / Level FR

Adjust the level of each channel.

-12.0 dB - +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

249

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Speaker Preset

Two speaker settings can be saved to suit the environments where you use your speakers.

For example, you can configure two presets easily to switch between equalizer or speaker settings measured using Audyssey® Setup if the characteristics of your room differ depending on factors such as whether you use the screen.

If you want to use a preset, select the preset you want to use and then configure settings such as Audyssey® Setup or the speaker settings to save those settings to the preset you have selected.

Preset 1

(Default):

Saves the settings to Preset 1.

Preset 2: Saves the settings to Preset 2.

• The following settings are saved to presets.
• "Amp Assign" settings
• "Speaker Config." settings
• "Distances" settings
• "Levels" settings
• "Crossovers" settings
• "Bass" settings
• "2ch Playback" settings
• "Front Speaker" settings
• "MultEQ ^ XT32" data
• "Graphic EQ" data
• This setting also be configured using "Speaker Preset" in the option menu. (p. 140)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

250

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Network

To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings.

If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set "DHCP" to "On". (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN).

When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the "IP Address" settings, and enter

information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.

Information

Display network information.

Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address / MAC Address (Ethernet) / MAC Address (Wi-Fi) / Wi-Fi signal strength

Connection

Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN.

When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select "Wired (Ethernet)" after connecting a LAN cable.

When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select "Wireless (Wi-Fi)" and configure the "Wi-Fi Setup". (127 p. 252)

Connect Using

Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN).

Wired (Ethernet): Use a LAN cable to connect to a network.

Wireless (Wi-Fi) (Default): Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to connect to a network.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

251

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Wi-Fi Setup

Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router.

The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection method to suit your home environment.

■ Scan Networks

Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible networks shown on the TV screen.

1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless networks.

Select "Rescan" if the network cannot be found.

1. Enter your password and select "OK".

■ Use iOS Device

Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By connecting your iOS device to this unit using Wi-Fi, the unit can be automatically connected to the same network as your device.

1. Select "Use iOS Device" on the TV screen.

2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router and select "Denon AVR-X4700H" from "SET UP NEW AIRPLAY SPEAKER..." at the bottom of the Wi-Fi configuration screen of your iOS device.

3. Tap "Next" on the screen of the iOS device.

- The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS 7 or later.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

252

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

WPS Router

Use a WPS-compatible router to connect using the push button method.

1. Select "Push Button" on the TV screen.
2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the router you wish to connect to.
3. The time for pressing the button varies depending on the router.
4. Select "Connect" on the TV screen within 2 minutes.

■ Manual

Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to connect to.

1. Set the following items.

SSID:	Input the name of the wireless network (SSID).
Security:	Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting of the access point you are using.

Password: Input the password.

1. Select "Connect" at the end of the setting.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

253

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

• The wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) settings of this unit can also be configured from a PC or tablet that supports wireless LAN connection.
• Press and hold the DIMMER and STATUS buttons on the main unit for at least 3 seconds when the power of the unit is on.
• Connect the wireless LAN of the PC or tablet used to "Denon AVR-X4700H" when the message "Connect your Wi-Fi device to Wi-Fi network called "Denon AVR-X4700H"." appears in the display.
• Start up the browser and enter "192.168.1.16/settings/" in the URL.
• Use the browser to enter the settings, select "Connect" and then exit the settings.
• The Default key of this unit is fixed at "1". Set Default key of the router to "1" to use.

Settings

Configure the IP address.

• If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information required for network connection such as the IP address will be automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to "On" in the default settings of this unit.
• Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting to a network without DHCP function.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

254

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

DHCP

Selects how to connect to the network.

On(Default):

Configure the network settings automatically from your router.

Off: Configure the network settings manually.

IP Address

Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.

- The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set.

CLASS A: 10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254

CLASS B: 172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254

CLASS C: 192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254

Subnet Mask

When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input "255.255.255.0".

■ Default Gateway

When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.

DNS

Enter the DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider.

• If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings. (tF p. 85)
• If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

255

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Network Control

Enables network communication in standby power mode.

Off In Standby: Suspend network function during standby.

Always On (Default):

Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network compatible controller.

- When using the web control function, Denon 2016 AVR Remote App or HEOS App, use with the "Network Control" setting set to "Always On".

NOTE

- When "Network Control" is set to "Always On", the unit consumes more standby power.

Friendly Name

The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.

■ Friendly Name

Selects Friendly Name from the list.

When you select "Other", you can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.

Home Theater /Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room / Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den / Office / Other

• Up to 30 characters can be input.
• The default Friendly Name on first use is "Denon AVR-X4700H".

■ Set Defaults

Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default setting.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

256

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Diagnostics

Used to check the network connection.

■ Physical Connection

Checks the physical LAN port connection.

OK

Error:

The LAN cable is not connected. Check the connection.

- When connected using a wireless LAN, "Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi)" will be displayed.

Router Access

Checks the connection from this unit to the router.

OK

Error:

Failed to communicate with the router.Check the router settings.

Internet Access

Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).

OK
Error:	Failed to connect to the Internet. Check the Internet connection environment or router settings.

AirPlay

Settings for Apple AirPlay.

On (Default): Enables Apple AirPlay.

Off: Disables Apple AirPlay.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

257

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

HEOS Account

Make HEOS Account-related settings.

HEOS Account is needed in order to use HEOS Favorites.

The menu displayed differs depending on the status of the HEOS Account.

You have not signed in

I have a HEOS Account

If you already have a HEOS Account, enter the current account name and password to sign in.

■ Create Account

If you do not have a HEOS Account, create a new HEOS Account.

■ Forgot Password

If you have forgotten the password, an email explaining how to reset the password will be sent.

You have already signed in

■ Signed in As

The currently signed in HEOS Account is displayed.

■ Change Location

Change the regional settings for the signed in HEOS Account.

■ Change Password

Change the password for the signed in HEOS Account.

Delete Account

Delete the signed in HEOS Account.

■ Sign Out

Sign out from the HEOS Account.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

258

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

General

Make various other settings.

Language

Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen.

English / Français / Español (Default: English)

- "Language" can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings.

1. Press and hold the main unit's STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same time for at least 3 seconds.
   "*Video Format " appears on the display.
2. Press on the main unit twice.
   "*GUI Language " appears on the display.
3. Use the main unit's ◀ or ▷ and set the language.
4. Press the main unit's ENTER to complete the setting.

ECO

Configure the ECO Mode and auto standby mode settings.

ECO Mode

This mode can reduce the power consumption and heat generation of this unit when power on.

This is done by reducing the power supply line to the power amplifier, in turn the maximum power output.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

259

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

On:	Power savings are always active, regardless of volume or input signal.
Auto(Default):	Gives you the best balance between power savings and maximum power output:For low volume levels, the power savings are active. If you increase the volume level, the power savings are switched off automatically, so you can enjoy maximum output power without distortion.If the volume is set to a high level but no input signal is detected for more than 2 minutes, this unit will enable power savings. When an input signal is detected again or the input source is changed, this unit will automatically turn off power savings again at high volume levels.
Off:	No power savings.

• When the unit is switching between the different power saving states in "ECO Mode: Auto", you may notice a click noise from the inside of this unit, this is normal.
• If content is paused for more than 2 minutes and playback is resumed from the same source at these high volume levels, there may be short delay before maximum power is restored.
• "ECO Mode" can also be switched by pressing ECO on the remote control unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

260

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Power On Default

Set the mode to ECO when the power is on.

Last (Default):	The ECO Mode will be set to the previous setting before the power was switched off.
On:	When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in “On”.
Auto:	When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in “Auto”.
Off:	When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in “Off”.

■ On Screen Display

Display the power consumption of this unit using a meter on the TV screen.

Always On:	Always display the meter on the TV screen.
Auto(Default):	Display the meter when changing the mode or volume.
Off: Do not display the meter.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

261

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Auto Standby

Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby.

MAIN ZONE

Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or video signals input into this unit.

Before the unit enters standby mode, "Auto Standby" is displayed on the unit display and the menu screen.

60 min:	The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes.
30 min:	The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes.
15 min:	The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes.
Off(Default):	The unit does not go into standby automatically.

ZONE2 / ZONE3

When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here, the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.

8 hours:	Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 the standby state after about 8 hours.
4 hours:	Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby state after about 4 hours.
2 hours:	Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby state after about 2 hours.
Off(Default):	Does not automatically switch ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby state.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

262

Bluetooth Transmitter

Sets this unit's Bluetooth transmitter.

Set to use Bluetooth headphones to listen to audio playing in the MAIN ZONE.

Transmitter

Enables or disables the Bluetooth transmitter.

Off(Default):

Disables the Bluetooth transmitter feature.

On: Enables the Bluetooth transmitter feature.

Output Mode

Selects the audio output method.

Bluetooth + Speakers (Default):	Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones and main zone speakers.
Bluetooth Only:	Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones only.

■ Connected device

Displays the Bluetooth device connected to this unit.

Device List

Available devices are displayed in the list once you start pairing mode on the Bluetooth headphones you want to connect. Select your Bluetooth headphones from the list to pair them.

This unit can only pair with one Bluetooth headphone at a time. However, up to 8 Bluetooth headphones can be registered. Switch between registered devices from Device List in the "Bluetooth Transmitter" setup menu.

To remove a saved Bluetooth device from the list, use the buttons to select it, then press the OPTION button and select "Forget This Device".

• "Output Mode" can also be set from "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the option menu.
• A2DP profile-compatible Bluetooth speakers can be connected following the same steps used to connect Bluetooth headphones.

NOTE

• Bluetooth transmitter and Bluetooth receiver function cannot be used at the same time. Settings in this menu are not available when listening to music on a Bluetooth device in any zone.
• Even when "Transmitter" is set to "On", press Bluetooth on the remote control to select the "Bluetooth" source and enable the Bluetooth receiver function. To listen to music stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones on this unit, press Bluetooth on the remote control to switch the input source to Bluetooth, then reconnect the Bluetooth device.
• Menu settings for Bluetooth Transmitter are not available when this unit is grouped within the HEOS App.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

263

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup

Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.

- Values set for "Volume Limit" and "Power On Volume" are displayed according to the setting specified for the volume "Scale". (19 p. 192)

Bass

Adjust bass.

-10dB - +10dB (Default : 0dB)

Treble

Adjust treble.

-10dB - +10dB (Default : 0dB)

■ High Pass Filter

Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.

On:	The low range is attenuated.
Off(Default):	The low range is not attenuated.

Lch Level

Adjust the left channel output level.

-12 dB - +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

Rch Level

Adjust the right channel output level.

-12 dB - +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

Channel

Set whether to playback in stereo or monaural.

Stereo

Stereo playback.

(Default):

Mono: Monaural playback.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

264

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ HDMI Audio (ZONE2 only)

Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2.

Through (Default):	The HDMI audio signal is passed through this unit to the device in ZONE2.
PCM:	The HDMI audio signal input into this unit is converted to a PCM signal that can be output from the ZONE2 PRE OUT connectors or speaker terminals.

Volume Level

Set the volume output level.

Variable(Default):	Volume can be adjusted.
1 – 98(-79 dB – 18 dB):	Volume is fixed at the desired level. The volume cannot be adjusting using the remote control unit.

- The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is “-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB”. (125 p. 192)

Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

60 - 80 (-20 dB - 0 dB)

(Default : 70 (-10 dB))

Off: Do not set a maximum volume.

• This can be set when "Volume Level" is set to "Variable". (☐ p. 265)
• The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is “-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB”. (12 p. 192)

Power On Volume

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Last (Default):	Use the memorized setting from the last session.
Mute: Always mute when power is turned on.
1 – 98 (-79 dB – 18 dB):	The volume is adjusted to the set level.

• This can be set when "Volume Level" is set to "Variable". (p. 265)
• The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is “-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB”. (p. 192)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

265

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

Full

(Default):

The sound is muted entirely.

-40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
-20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

Zone Rename

Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.

The default setting is restored for the edited zone name.

- Up to 10 characters can be input.

Quick Select Names

Change the quick select name that appears on the TV screen to one you prefer.

Quick Select 1 / Quick Select 2 / Quick Select 3 / Quick Select 4

Set Defaults:

The default setting is restored for the edited quick select name.

- Up to 16 characters can be input.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

266

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2

Select the conditions for activating trigger out.

For details about how to connect the TRIGGER OUT jacks, see

"TRIGGER OUT jacks" (p. 88).

☐ When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3)

Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to "On".

☐ When setting for input source

Activate trigger out when the input source set to "On" is selected.

☐ When setting for HDMI monitor

Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to "On" is selected.

On: Activate trigger on this mode.

---: Do not activate trigger on this mode.

Front Display

Makes settings related to the display on this unit.

Dimmer

Adjust the display brightness of this unit.

Bright

Normal display brightness.

(Default):

Dim: Reduced display brightness.

Dark: Very low display brightness.

Off: Turns the display off.

- You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

267

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Channel Indicators

Sets whether to use the input signal display or output signal display for the channel indication on the display.

Input:	Uses the input signal display for the channel indication on the display.
Output (Default):	Uses the output signal display for the channel indication on the display.

Firmware

Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display for upgrades.

■ Check for Update

Check for firmware updates.

The firmware can be updated if a firmware update has been released.

Update Now:

Execute the update process. When the update starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the update, the progress is shown on the display.

Update Later: Update later.

• This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If an update still cannot be performed, an "Update Error" message appears in the display. See "Troubleshooting" – "Update/upgrade error messages" for information on update error messages. (127) p. 306)
  Check the conditions according to the message and try the update again.
• This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

268

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Auto-Update

Turns on Automatic Updates so that futures updates are automatically downloaded and installed when this unit is in standby mode.

Auto-Update

This unit will automatically update to the newest firmware when in standby mode.

On: Turns on Automatic Updates.

Off

(Default):

Turns off Automatic Updates.

Time Zone

Change the time zone.

Set the time zone that matches the area where you live.

- This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".

■ Allow Update

Enable or disable updates and upgrades for this unit.

On(Default):	Enables this unit to receive updates and upgrades.
Off:	Prevents this unit from receiving update and upgrade.

- This setting causes Incompatibilities between this unit and HEOS App.

■ Upgrade Notification

When the latest Upgrade firmware is available, a notification message is displayed on the TV screen at power on.

The notification message is displayed for about 40 seconds when the power is turned on.

On

(Default):

Display upgrade message.

Off: Do not display upgrade message.

- This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

269

■ Add New Feature

Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform an upgrade.

Upgrade Package: Display the items to be upgraded.

Upgrade Status:	Display a list of the additional functions provided by the upgrade.
Upgrade:	Execute the upgrade process.When the upgrade starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the upgrade, the amount of upgrade time which has elapsed is displayed.

• Information regarding the "Update" function and "Add New Feature" will be announced on the Denon website each time related plans are defined. See the Denon website for details about upgrades.
• When the procedure is complete, "Registered" is displayed in this menu and upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, "Not Registered" is displayed.
  The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the procedure.
  The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main unit's and INFO for at least 3 seconds.
• If the upgrade is not successful, "Upgrade Error" message appears in the display. See "Troubleshooting" – "Update/upgrade error messages" for information on upgrade error messages. (1 p. 306)
  Check the settings and network environment and then perform the upgrade again.
• This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".

Notes concerning use of "Update" and "Add New Feature"

• In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (12 p. 85)
• Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
• Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure to be completed.
• Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore, there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters, etc., set on this unit.
• If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the ⏻ on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. After about 1 minute, "Please wait" appears on the display and update restarts. If the error continues, check the network environment.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

270

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Information

Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.

Audio

Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.

Sound Mode: The currently set sound mode.

Input Signal: The input signal type.

Format:	The number of input signal channels (presence of front, surround, LFE).
Sample Rate: The input signal's sampling frequency.
Offset:	The dialogue normalization correction value.
Flag:	This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back channel.“MATRIX” is displayed with DTS-ES Matrix input signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-ES Discrete signals.

Video

Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information for MAIN ZONE.

HDMI Signal Info.

Resolution / HDR / Color Space / Pixel Depth / ALLM / QMS / QFT

HDMI Monitor 1 / HDMI Monitor 2

Interface / HDR / Resolutions / Enhanced Features

- A or B may be displayed at the end of resolution. A represents uncompressed video and B represents compressed video.

ZONE

Show information about current settings.

MAIN ZONE:	This item shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE. The information displayed differs according to the input source.
ZONE2/3:	This item shows information about settings for ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

271

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

■ Firmware

Version:	Displays information for the current firmware.
DTS Version:	Displays the current DTS version.

Notifications

Displays and sets notifications.

Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is turned on.

Notification Alerts

On(Default):	Notification messages are displayed.
Off: Notification messages are not displayed.

- Press INFO on the remote control unit to display current source name, volume, sound mode name, and other information at the bottom of the screen.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

In

272

Contents

Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Usage Data

To help us improve our products and customer service, Denon collects anonymous information about how you use this unit (such as frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings).

Denon will never provide any information we collect to third parties.

Yes:	Provide information on the operating status of this unit.
No:	Do not provide information on the operating status of this unit.

Save & Load

Save and restore device settings by using a USB memory device.

• Use a USB memory device that has at least 128 MB of free space and is formatted to FAT32. Data may not Save/Load correctly to some USB memory devices.
• It may take up to 10 minutes for data to Save/Load. Do not turn off the power until the process is complete.

■ Save Configuration

Current unit settings are stored on the USB memory device.

When the settings are saved correctly, "Saved" appears on the display and the file "config.avr" is created on the USB memory device.

- Do not change the file name of the created file. Doing so will prevent the file from being recognized as a settings file when restoring.

Load Configuration

Settings saved on the USB memory device are restored.

When the saved settings are restored correctly, "Loaded" appears on the display and the unit automatically restarts.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

273

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Setup Lock

Protect settings from inadvertent changes.

Lock

On: Turn protection on.

Off

(Default):

Turn protection off.

- When cancelling the setting, set "Lock" to "Off".

NOTE

- When "Lock" is set to "On", no setting items are displayed except for "Setup Lock".

Reset

Returns settings to the factory default.

Initialization can be performed for all unit settings or for Network settings only.

All Settings

All settings are reset to the factory default values.

■ Network Settings

Only network settings are reset to the factory default values.

• Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the "Save & Load" function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (p. 273)
• The "Reset" operation can also be performed by using the button on the main unit. For details on resetting all of the settings to the factory defaults see "Resetting factory settings" (127 p. 307), and for details on resetting the network settings to the factory defaults see "Resetting network settings" (127 p. 308).

NOTE

- Do not disconnect the power or turn the device off during network settings initialization.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

274

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Operating external devices with the remote control unit

When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit, it can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD players or TVs made by different manufacturers.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

275

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Registering preset codes

There are two methods for registering preset codes; the simple method for registering preset codes of Denon players, and the method for registering the preset numbers of other manufacturers' devices.

• "Registering Denon players" (p. 276)
• "Registering by entering preset numbers" (p. 277)

■ Registering Denon players

Use the following simple method to register the preset codes of Denon Blu-ray Disc players, DVD players and CD players.

☐ Registering Blu-ray Disc players

1 Press and hold down Blu-ray and OPTION until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.

☐ Registering DVD players
1 Press and hold down DVD and OPTION until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.
☐ Registering CD players
1 Press and hold down CD and OPTION until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

276

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

☐ Registering multiple players at the same time

1 Press and hold down QUICK SELECT 1 - 4 and OPTION until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.

Devices to be registered at the same time			Press and hold down the buttons
Blu-ray Disc player	DVD player	CD player
√	√		QUICK SELECT 1 and OPTION
√		√	QUICK SELECT 2 and OPTION
	√	√	QUICK SELECT 3 and OPTION
√ √ √			QUICK SELECT 4 and OPTION

NOTE

- Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may not operate. In this case, try "Registering by entering preset numbers" (p. 277).

■ Registering by entering preset numbers

The following table shows the device groups that can be registered for each of the input source select buttons. Check the preset number of the device you want to register beforehand in the "Remote Control Preset Codes" file. http://manuals.denon.com/AVRX4700H/preset/ AVRX4700HPresetCodes.pdf

Button Device groups that can be registered
	CBL/SAT group
	VCR/PVR group, BD/DVD group
	CBL/SAT group, VCR/PVR group,BD/DVD group, Audio group
	CBL/SAT group
	VCR/PVR group, BD/DVD group
	CBL/SAT group, VCR/PVR group,BD/DVD group, Audio group
	CBL/SAT group, VCR/PVR group,BD/DVD group, Audio group
	Audio group
	TV group

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

277

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

1 Press and hold down the input source button that you want to register the preset code to and SETUP until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators are flashing green.
2 Enter the preset number (5 digits) listed for the device in the Preset Code Table using the number buttons (0 - 9) on the remote control.

- Some manufacturers use more than one type of preset code. Preset codes to change the number and verify correct operation.

NOTE

- Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may not operate.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

278

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Operating devices

To operate an external device, press the input source button registered with the preset code, followed by one of the buttons in the following tables.

• The "DEV." indicator lights when an external device is being operated.
• The "TV" indicator lights when the TV is being operated.
• To operate the menu of this unit, press MAIN before operating the unit. The "AVR" operation mode indicator lights when the unit is being operated.

CBL/SAT group

(Set top box for satellite (SAT)/cable TV (CBL)/Media player/IP TV) operation

Operation buttons Function

DEVICE ⏻ Power on/off

DEVICE MENU Menu

CH/PAGE ▲▼ Switch channels (up/down)

INFO Information

OPTION Sub menu, Option

△ ▽ ◀ ▷ Cursor operation

ENTER(Cursor) Enter

BACK Back

SETUP Home menu

Skip chapter

▶ Playback

Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

II Pause

■ Stop

0 - 9, +10 Channel selection

ENTER(Number) 3 digit entry

- Depending on the device, the power may not be turned off for the DEVICE ⏻ buttons.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

279

Remote

Index

graph LR
    A["Contents"] --> B["Connections"]
    B --> C["Playback"]
    C --> D["Settings"]
    D --> E["Tips"]
    E --> F["Appendix"]

☐ TV group (TV) operation

Operation buttons Function

TV ⏻ TV power on/off

TV INPUT Switch TV input

TV MENU TV menu

CH/PAGE ▲▼ Switch channels (up/down)

INFO Information

OPTION Sub menu, Option

△ ▽ ◀ ▷ Cursor operation

ENTER(Cursor) Enter

BACK Back

SETUP Setup

Skip chapter

▶ Playback

◀◀▶▶ Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

II Pause

■ Stop

0 - 9, +10 Channel selection

ENTER(Number) 3 digit entry

☐ VCR/PVR group (Video cassette recorder (VCR)/personal video recorder (PVR)) operation

Operation buttons Function

DEVICE ⏻ Power on/off

DEVICE MENU Menu

CH/PAGE ▲▼ Switch channels (up/down)

INFO Information

OPTION Sub menu, Option

△ ▽ ◀ ▷ Cursor operation

ENTER Enter

BACK Back

SETUP Setup

Skip chapter

▶ Playback

Fast-reverse / Fast-forward

II Pause

■ Stop

0 - 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel selection

• Depending on the device, the power may not be turned off for the DEVICE ⏻ and TV ⏻ buttons.
• TV ⊙ and TV INPUT buttons can be operated at any time without pressing the TV button.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

280

Remote

Index

Contents Connections Playback

Tips

Appendix

☐ BD/DVD group (Blu-ray Disc player/HD-DVD player/DVD player/DVD recorder) operation

Operation buttons Function

DEVICE ⏻	Power on/off
DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu
CH/PAGE ▲▼	Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
OPTION Top menu
△▽ ◀ ▷	Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
I◀◀ ▶▶▶	Skip chapter
▶	Playback
◀◀ ▶▶	Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
■	Pause
■	Stop
0 - 9, +10	Select title, chapter or channel selection

☐ Audio group (CD player/CD recorder) operation

Operation buttons Function
DEVICE ⏻	Power on/off
INFO Information
	Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
	Skip track
	Playback
	Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
	Pause
	Stop
0 – 9, +10 Track selection

- Depending on the device, the DEVICE ⏻ button only performs the power-on operation. (Depending on the device, some Denon models can only be operated with the power turned on.)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

281

Remote

Index

Contents Connections Playback

Tips Appendix

Initializing registered preset codes

1 Press and hold down MAIN and OPTION until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.

Specifying the operating zone with the remote control

To prevent accidental misuse, you can set the zone for which the remote control unit is used.

1 Press and hold down either MAIN, Z2 or Z3 and SETUP at the same time until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators flash green.

MAIN: When only using MAIN ZONE

Z2: When using MAIN ZONE and ZONE2

Z3(Default):

When using MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3

Resetting the remote control unit

All the settings are restored to their defaults.

1 Press and hold down DEVICE MENU until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.
2 Press 9, 8 and 1, in that order.

The DEV., TV and AVR indicators flash twice.

All the settings are restored to their defaults.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

282

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Contents

Tips

I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 284

I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 284

I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 284

I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 284

I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level 284

I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies 284

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new one 285

I want to combine a desired video with the current music 285

I want to skip unused input sources 285

I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 285

I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I'm playing a game on my game console 285

I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control 285

Troubleshooting

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off 287
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 288
Display on this unit shows nothing 288
No sound comes out 289
Desired sound does not come out	290
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs	293
No video is shown on the TV	294
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV	296
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal	296
AirPlay cannot be played back	297
USB memory devices cannot be played back	298
Bluetooth cannot be played back	299
The Internet radio cannot be played back	301
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back	302
Various online services cannot be played	303
The HDMI Control function does not work	303
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network	304
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly	305
Update/upgrade error messages	306

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

283

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Tips

I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake

- Set the volume upper limit for "Volume Limit" in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake. You can set this for each zone. ("Volume" (p. 192), "Volume Limit" (p. 265))

I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on

- By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume level, set the volume level at power on for "Power On Volume" in the menu. You can set this for each zone. ("Volume" (p. 192), "Power On Volume" (p. 265))

I want to have the subwoofer always output audio

- Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”, you can have the subwoofer always output audio. (p. 246)

I want to make human voices in the movies clearer

- Use "Center Level Adjust" in the menu to adjust the level. (☐ p. 182)

I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level

- Set "Dynamic EQ" in the menu to "On". This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost even during playback at a lower volume level. (p. 194)

I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies

- Set “Dynamic Volume” in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted to your desired level. (p. 195)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

284

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new one

• Perform Audyssey® Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (p. 219)
  I want to combine a desired video with the current music
• Set "Video Select" in the option menu to "On". You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top Box or DVD, etc. while listening to music from the Tuner, CD, Phono, HEOS Music, USB or Bluetooth. (127 p. 137)
  I want to skip unused input sources
• Set unused input sources for "Hide Sources" in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the SOURCE SELECT knob on this unit. (17 p. 217)
  I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc.
• Set "All Zone Stereo" in the option menu to "Start". You can simultaneously play back music in another room (ZONE2, ZONE3) that is played back in MAIN ZONE. (197 p. 139)
  I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I'm playing a game on my game console
• When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set "Video Mode" in the menu to "Game". (p. 206)
  I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control
• Select "AV Receiver" in a TV menu such as "Input"* or "Operate Connected HDMI Device"*. The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV. This Smart Menu can be operated using the remote control of your TV.
  * The selection method differs depending on your TV. See the owner's manual of your TV for details.
  I want to use the external power amplifier to the Front channel for my 11.1-channel speaker system
• Set "Pre-out" to "Front" to connect your external power amplifier for the front channels. (17 p. 237)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

285

Contents Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Troubleshooting

If a problem should arise, first check the following:

1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner's manual?
3. Are the other devices operating properly?

- If steps 1 to 3 above do not improve the problem, restarting the device may improve the problem.

Continue pressing the ⏻ button on the unit until "Restart" appears in the display, or remove and re-insert the power cord of the unit.

If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section.

If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

286

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off

Power does not turn on.

- Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet. (☐ p. 89)

Power automatically turns off.

• The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again. (p. 159)
• "Auto Standby" is set. "Auto Standby" is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To disable "Auto Standby", set "Auto Standby" on the menu to "Off". (1 p. 262)

Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 2 seconds.

• The protection circuit has been activated due to a rise in temperature within this unit. Turn the power off, wait about an hour until this unit cools down sufficiently, and then turn the power on again. (17 p. 329)
• Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation.

Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 0.5 seconds.

• Check the speaker connections. The protection circuit may have been activated because speaker cable core wires came in contact with each other or a core wire was disconnected from the connector and came in contact with the rear panel of this unit. After unplugging the power cord, take corrective action such as firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the connector, and then reconnect the wire. (129 p. 40)
• Turn down the volume and turn on the power again. (p. 91)
• This unit's amplifier circuit has failed. Unplug the power cord and contact our customer service center.

The power to this unit does not turn off when you press the Power operation button. "ZONE2 On" or "ZONE3 On" appears on the display.

- Power in either ZONE2 or ZONE3 is on. To turn off the power of the device (standby), press either the ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF button on the main unit or press the POWER ⏻ button after pressing the Z2 or Z3 button on the remote control unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

287

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit.

• Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries. (p. 9)
• Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 23 ft/7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30^ . (1-5 p. 9)
• Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit.
• Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the and marks. (1) p. 9)
• The set's remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.
• The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote control unit. Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the zone to operate. (187 p. 181)
• The remote control unit operating mode is used to operate other devices. Press MAIN to set the operating mode to AVR. (p. 279)
• When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of infrared communications between units (such as TV and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not affect operations from the remote control unit of this unit.

Display on this unit shows nothing

Display is off.

• Set "Dimmer" on the menu to something other than "Off". (☐ p. 267)
• When the sound mode is set to "Pure Direct", the display is off. (☐ p. 144)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

288

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

No sound comes out

No sound comes out of speakers.

• Check the connections for all devices. (☐ p. 40)
• Insert connection cables all the way in.
• Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.
• Check cables for damage.
• Check that speaker cables are properly connected. Check that cable core wires come in contact with the metal part on speaker terminals. (1 p. 40)
• Securely tighten the speaker terminals. Check speaker terminals for looseness. (☐ p. 40)
• Check that a proper input source is selected. (p. 91)
• Adjust the volume. (1 p. 92)
• Cancel the mute mode. (1-6 p. 92)
• Check the digital audio input connector setting. (☐ p. 214)
• Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output is set to off by default.
• When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the speaker terminal and PRE OUT connector.
• Audio is output to your Bluetooth headphones, but not to speakers or pre-outs when "Output Mode" set to "Bluetooth Only". Change "Output Mode" to "Bluetooth + Speakers" to output audio from your Bluetooth headphones as well as your speakers or pre-outs. (16 p. 263)

No sound comes out when using the DVI-D connection.

- When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a separate audio connection.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

289

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Desired sound does not come out

The volume does not increase.

• The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using "Limit" on the menu. (☐ p. 192)
• Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings, so the volume may not reach the upper limit.

The volume of Bluetooth headphones does not decrease.

- Bluetooth headphones volume cannot be adjusted from this unit. Use a Bluetooth headphones with volume adjustment.

No sound comes out with the HDMI connection.

• Check the connection of the HDMI connectors. (p. 73)
• When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set "HDMI Audio Out" on the menu to "AVR". To output from the TV, set "TV". (10 p. 200)
• When using the HDMI Control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV. (12 p. 156)

When an eARC function-compatible television is connected, television audio is not output from the speaker connected to this unit

• eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this setting exists on your television. For more information, check your television's owner's manual.
• Make sure the input source of this unit is "TV Audio".
• The eARC function does not operate when the HDMI input connector is set to the "TV Audio" input source. To enable eARC function operation, remove the HDMI input connector setting, then restart this unit and the television. (p. 215)

No sound comes out of a specific speaker.

• Check that speaker cables are properly connected.
• Check that a selection other than "None" is set for the "Speaker Config." setting in menu. (☐ p. 238)
• Check the "Assign Mode" setting in the menu. (☐ p. 230)
• When the sound mode is "Stereo" and "Virtual", audio is only output from the front speakers and subwoofer.
• Audio is not output from the surround back speaker if "Speaker Virtualizer" is set to "On" when "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is set to "1 spkr" in the menu. (1 p. 185)
• When "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is set to "2 spkrs", "Speaker Config." - "Center" is set to "Large" or "Small", and sound mode is set to "IMAX DTS", surround audio is output from the surround back speaker. Audio is not output from the surround speaker. (1 p. 239)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

290

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

No sound is produced from subwoofer.

• Check the subwoofer connections.
• Turn on the subwoofer's power.
• Set "Speaker Config." - "Subwoofer" in the menu to "1 spkr" or "2 spkrs". (p. 238)
• When "Speaker Config." - "Front" in the menu is set to "Large", depending on the input signal and the sound mode, no sound may be output from the subwoofer. (p. 238)
• When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the subwoofer. (☐ p. 246)
• You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the "Subwoofer Mode" to "LFE+Main". (p. 246)

DTS sound is not output.

- Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to "DTS".

Dolby Atmos, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus audio is not output.

• Make HDMI connections. (☐ p. 77)
- Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, "PCM" is set by default.

DTS Neural:X mode cannot be selected.

- DTS Neural:X cannot be selected when using the headphones.

Dolby Surround mode cannot be selected.

- Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones.

IMAX DTS:X cannot be selected.

- IMAX DTS:X and IMAX DTS cannot be selected but DTS:X and DTS can be selected, when the headphones are used.

Sound modes other than "Stereo" or "Direct" cannot be selected.

- Only "Stereo" or "Direct" can be selected for the sound mode if Headphone:X signals are input.

291

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Audyssey MultEQ ^® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® , Audyssey Dynamic Volume ^® and Audyssey LFC ^™ cannot be selected.

• These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey® Setup. (p. 219)
• Switch to a sound mode other than "Direct" or "Pure Direct". (14 p. 143)
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^ , Audyssey Dynamic Volume ^ and Audyssey LFC ^TM cannot be selected when sound mode is “DTS Virtual:X” or sound mode that have “+ Virtual:X” in the sound mode name.
  • These cannot be selected when using the headphones.

"Restorer" cannot be selected.

• Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS surround, "Restorer" cannot be used. (p. 190)
• Switch to a sound mode other than "Direct" or "Pure Direct". (☐ p. 143)

No audio is output from PRE OUT or speakers for ZONE2/ZONE3.

• In ZONE2/ZONE3, the audio can be played back when signals input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are in 2ch PCM format.
• In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from the HDMI connector are in 2ch PCM format. To play back the audio in ZONE2 irrespective of the input signal format, set "HDMI Audio" in the menu to "PCM". Depending on the played back device, the audio may not be played back even with this setting. In that case, set the audio format to "PCM (2ch)" on the played back device. (p. 265)
• When listening to audio from a Bluetooth device in ZONE2/ZONE3, remove any obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit and use it within a range of about 98.4 ft/30 m.

Sound mode settings are not available when using Bluetooth headphones. Audio menu settings are also not available.

- This unit cannot change sound mode or audio menu settings for audio output to Bluetooth headphones.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

292

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Sound is interrupted or noise occurs

During playback from the Internet radio or USB memory device, sound is occasionally interrupted.

• When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted.
• The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy.

When making a call on iPhone, noise occurs in audio output on this unit.

- When making a call, keep a distance of 0.7 ft/20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit.

Noise often occurs in FM/AM broadcasting.

• Change the antenna orientation or position. (☐ p. 83)
• Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit.
• Use an outdoor antenna. (p. 83)
• Separate the antenna from other connection cables. (1) p. 83)

The sounds appear to be distorted.

• Lower the volume. (10 p. 92)
• Set "Off" to the "ECO Mode". When "On" or "Auto" is in the "ECO Mode", the audio may be distorted when the playback volume is high. (p. 259)

Sound cuts out when using Wi-Fi connection.

• The frequency band used by the wireless LAN is also used by microwave ovens, cordless telephones, wireless game controllers and other wireless LAN devices. Using such devices at the same time as this unit may cause sound to cut out due to electronic interference. Sound cut out can be improved using the following methods. (17 p. 85)
• Install devices that cause interference away from this unit.
• Turn off the power supply to devices that cause interference.
• Change the settings of the router channel to which this unit is connected to. (See the instruction manual of the wireless router for details on how to change the channel.)
• Switch to a wired LAN connection.
• Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the playback sound may be interrupted. In this case, make the wired LAN connection. (☎ p. 252)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

293

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

No video is shown on the TV

No picture appears.

• Check the connections for all devices. (☐ p. 73)
• Insert connection cables all the way in.
• Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected.
• Check cables for damage.
• Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit. (1 p. 214)
• Check that the proper input source is selected. (17 p. 91)
• Check the video input connector setting. (p. 214)
• Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV. (195 p. 271)
• Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video will not be output correctly. (1 p. 313)
  • To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3.
• The HDMI signal cannot be converted to an analog signal. Use analog connections. (p. 314)
• To play back a 4K video, use a "High Speed HDMI Cable" or an "High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet". In order to achieve a higher fidelity for 4K videos, it is recommended to use a "Premium High Speed HDMI Cables" or an "Premium High Speed HDMI Cables with Ethernet" that has an HDMI Premium Certified Cable label on the product package.
• Use an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable" to enjoy 8K or 4K 120Hz video.

No video is shown on the TV with the DVI-D connection.

- With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the copy guard copyright protection (HDCP). (12p. 313)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

294

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

No video from an input source such as a game console is shown on the TV.

- When special video signals are input from a game console, etc., the Video Conversion function may not function. Connect the input connector to the monitor output connector of the same type.

While the menu is being displayed, no video is shown on the TV.

- The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated during playback of the following video signals.

- Some images of 3D video contents

- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)

- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3

- 4K or 8K video

- Some kind of HDR signals

- Some kind of game contents

- Compressed video

When using HDMI ZONE2, the video output in MAIN ZONE is interrupted.

- When ZONE2 is operated with the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, video in MAIN ZONE may be interrupted.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

295

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

The menu screen is not displayed on the TV

The menu screen or status information screen is not displayed on the TV.

• The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected with an HDMI cable. If this unit is connected to a TV using a different video output connector, operate while watching the display on this unit.

• The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played.

• Some images of 3D video content

• Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
• Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3
• Some kind of HDR signals
• Some kind of game contents

• Compressed video

• When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is not displayed properly. (p. 272)

• In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a sound mode other than the pure direct mode. (127 p. 142)
• Set the "TV Format" setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV. (17 p. 213)

The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal

The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different.

- Performing operations on this unit during playback of a Dolby Vision signal may cause variance in the color display of the menu screen and operations content. This is a characteristic of the Dolby Vision signal and is not a malfunction.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

296

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

AirPlay cannot be played back

The AirPlay icon is not displayed on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.

• This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to the same LAN as this unit. (1 p. 85)
• The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to the latest version.

Audio is not output.

• The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level.
• The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon on the iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this unit. (129)

Audio is interrupted during the AirPlay playback on iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.

• Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using AirPlay.
• Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by taking measures such as shortening the distance from the wireless LAN access point.

iTunes cannot be played back through the remote control unit.

- Enable the "Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers" setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform playback, pause, and skip operations through the remote control unit.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

297

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

USB memory devices cannot be played back

USB memory device is not recognized.

• Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device. (☐ p. 82)
• Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported.
• This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port.
• The USB memory device must be formatted to "FAT32" or "NTFS".
• Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized. When using a type of portable hard disc drive compatible with the USB connection that requires power from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.

Files on the USB memory device are not displayed.

• Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (p. 93)
• This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can also be displayed for each layer. Modify the folder structure of the USB memory device.
• When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed.

iOS and Android devices are not recognized.

- The USB port of this unit does not support playback from iOS and Android devices.

Files on a USB memory device cannot be played.

• Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit. (P. 316)
• You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.
• Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

298

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Bluetooth cannot be played back

Bluetooth devices cannot be connected to this unit.

• The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owner's Manual of the Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function.
• Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit.
• The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile.
• Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again.

Smartphones and other Bluetooth devices cannot be connected.

- Smartphones and other Bluetooth devices cannot be connected when "Transmitter" is set to "On". Press Bluetooth on the remote control to switch the input source to Bluetooth, then connect the device. (127 p. 263)

Cannot connect Bluetooth headphones.

• Bring the Bluetooth headphones near to this unit.
• Turn the power of the Bluetooth headphones off and on again, and then try again.
• Go to "General" - "Bluetooth Transmitter", and set "Transmitter" to "On" within the menu. (p. 263)
• Make sure this unit is not already connected to another pair of Bluetooth headphones. Check the currently connected Bluetooth headphones by pressing INFO on the remote control or STATUS button on the unit. Disconnect the connected Bluetooth headphones before connecting the ones you want to use.
• Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected if Bluetooth is being used as an input source in any zone.
• Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected if this unit is grouped in the HEOS App. Remove this unit from the group to enable Bluetooth headphones connection.
• The Bluetooth headphones cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile.
• Connection and operation are not guaranteed for all Bluetooth-enabled devices.
• This unit can only connect to one Bluetooth headphone at a time. However, up to 8 Bluetooth headphones can be registered. You can switch between registered devices from "Device List" in the "Bluetooth Transmitter" menu. (129 p. 263)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

299

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

The sound is cut off.

• Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit.
• Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit.
  • To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN devices and other Bluetooth devices.
• Reconnect the Bluetooth device.

The sound is cut off or noise occurs when using Bluetooth headphones.

• Move the Bluetooth headphones closer to this unit.
• Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth headphones and this unit.
• Reconnect the Bluetooth headphones.
  • To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN devices and other Bluetooth devices.
• We recommend using wired LAN to connect this unit and other devices.
• Bluetooth transmits on the 2.4 GHz band which may interfere with Wi-Fi transmitted on this band. Connect this unit and other devices to Wi-Fi network on a 5 GHz band if available on your Wi-Fi router.

Audio is delayed on my Bluetooth headphones.

- This unit cannot adjust audio delay on Bluetooth headphones.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

300

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

The Internet radio cannot be played back

A list of broadcasting stations is not displayed.

• The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status. (Lp. 85)
• Perform the network diagnostic mode.

Internet Radio cannot be played.

• The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and AAC. (127 p. 319)
• The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting.
  • The IP address is not properly set. (p. 254)
• Check the power of the router is on.
• To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the DHCP setting to "On" on this unit. (p. 254)
• To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address on this unit. (p. 254)
• Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a while and select the same radio station, or select another radio station. (12 p. 114)
• The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service.

Cannot connect to favorite radio stations.

- Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

301

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back

Files stored on a computer cannot be played.

• Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format. (p. 318)
• Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.
• The USB port of this unit cannot be used for connection to a computer.
• Media sharing settings on the server or NAS do not allow this unit. Change the settings to allow this unit. For details, see the owner's manual of the server or NAS.

Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server.

• The computer's or router's firewall is activated. Check the computer's or router's firewall settings.
• Computer's power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
• Server is not running. Launch the server.
• IP address of this unit is wrong. Check the IP address of this unit. (19 p. 251)

Music files on PC cannot be played back.

• Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC to this unit through the network. (p. 85)

Files on PC or NAS are not displayed.

- Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (p. 318)

Music stored on a NAS cannot be played.

• If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS setting.
• If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows Media Player's media sharing function and add NAS to the selected play folder.
• If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

302

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Various online services cannot be played

Various online services cannot be played.

- The online service may have been discontinued.

The HDMI Control function does not work

The HDMI Control function does not work.

• Check that "HDMI Control" in the menu is set to "On". (☐ p. 202)
• You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI Control function. In addition, depending on the connected device or the settings, the HDMI Control function may not work. In this case, operate the external device directly. (p. 156)
• Check that the HDMI Control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit. (p. 156)
• When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on again. (p. 156)
• The HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is not compatible with the HDMI Control function. Use the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector to connect to the TV. (17 p. 73)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

303

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network

Cannot connect to the network.

• The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the network settings according to the setting details of this unit. (127 p. 253)
• Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access first before re-connecting again. Place the unit away from microwave ovens and other network access points.
• Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks.
• This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN).

Cannot connect to a WPS Router.

• Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating.
• Press the WPS button on the router and then press the "Connect" button displayed on the TV within 2 minutes.
• A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption time to "None", "WPA-PSK (AES)" or WPA2-PSK (AES). (18) p. 253)
• If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP, you cannot connect by using the WPS button on the router. In this case, use the "Scan Networks" or "Manual" method to connect.

Cannot connect to the network using iPhone/iPod touch/iPad.

• Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version.
• When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 7 or later needs to be supported.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

304

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly

When using MAIN ZONE, video output is interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.

- With the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, when you operate MAIN ZONE, video may be interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.

When using HDMI ZONE2, no video or audio is output from the TV in ZONE2.

• Check that the power is on for ZONE2. (☐ p. 175)
• Check the input source for ZONE2. (p. 175)
• The AUX-HDMI and HDMI 7 connector does not support the HDMI ZONE2 function.
• In ZONE2, playback is only possible when the input signals are HDMI signals.
• When the TV does not support the input audio format, audio is not output. Set the audio format to "PCM" on the playback device. Alternatively, set "ZONE2 Setup" - "HDMI Audio" in the menu to "PCM". (12 p. 265)
• When the TV is not compatible with the resolution of the input video, no video is output. Set the output resolution on the playback device to a resolution that is compatible with the TV.

When using HDMI ZONE2, MAIN ZONE audio is played back as PCM.

- When the same input source is selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, the audio format is limited according to the specifications of the TV in ZONE2.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

305

Contents Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Update/upgrade error messages

If an update/upgrade is interrupted or fails, an error message appears.

Display Description
Connection failed. Please check your network, then try again.	The network connection is unstable.Connection to the server failed.Check your network environment and try the update again.
Update failed. Please check your network, then try again.	The download of the firmware failed.Check your network environment and try the update again.
Upgrade failed. Please check your network, then try again.	The download of the firmware failed.Check your network environment and try the upgrade again.
Please check your network, unplug and reconnect the power cord, and try again.	The update failed.Press and hold the ⏻ on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord.The update restarts automatically.
Please contact customer service in your area. This unit may be broken.Contact our Customer Service Center in your area.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

306

Contents

Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Resetting factory settings

If the indicators are incorrect or the unit cannot be operated, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the unit before returning the settings to the default settings. (p. 286)

If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below.

Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.

1 Turn off the power using ⏻.
2 Press ⏻ while simultaneously pressing INFO and BACK.
3 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when "Initialized" appears on the display.

• Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the "Save & Load" function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (p. 273)
• You can also reset all settings to the factory defaults using "Reset" - "All Settings" in the menu. (17 p. 274)

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

307

Contents Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Resetting network settings

If network contents cannot be played or the unit cannot connect to the network, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the unit before returning the settings to the default settings. (165 p. 286)

If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below.

Network settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.

However, the menu "Amp Assign", "Speaker Config." and "Video" settings are not reset.

SOURCE SELECT DIMMER

Front view of a computer monitor with control buttons and indicator lights (no text or symbols visible)

1 Press ⏻ to turn on power to the unit.
2 Turn SOURCE SELECT to select "HEOS Music".
3 Press and hold the main unit's DIMMER and ▷ at the same time for at least 3 seconds.
4 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when "Network Reset..." appears on the display.
5 "Completed" is shown in the display when reset is complete.

• Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the "Save & Load" function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (19 p. 273)
• You can also reset the network settings to the factory defaults using "Reset" - "Network Settings" in the menu. (p. 274)

NOTE

- Do not turn the power off until reset is complete.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

308

Contents Connections Playback Settings

Appendix

Restoring the firmware to the factory defaults

When the unit or the network functions do not work properly, operation may be improved by restoring the firmware to the factory defaults.

Do this when the unit still does not work properly even after trying the steps for “Resetting factory settings” or “Resetting network settings”. (1) p. 307, 308)

After the firmware is restored, various settings are reset to the default settings. Configure the settings and update the firmware again.

1 Press ⏻ while simultaneously pressing SETUP and DIMMER.
2 When "Restoring FW..." appears on the display, release the buttons.

When the firmware restore is complete, "Completed" appears on the display for about 5 seconds, and the unit automatically restarts.

• This operation takes time because it requires reconnecting to the network, restoring and updating the firmware.
• If this operation does not improve the problem, contact our customer service center.

NOTE

- Do not turn off the power until the firmware restore is complete.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

309

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

About HDMI

HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier. With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not possible with the analog video transmission. Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system. This unit supports the following HDMI functions.

- Deep Color

An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr, which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024 shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce colors in higher definition. Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.

• x.v.Color

This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables display with natural, vivid colors. "x.v.Color" is trademark of Sony Corporation.

• 3D

This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.

• 4K / 8K

This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) and 8K (7680 x 4320 pixels) video signals of HDMI.

- Content Type

It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type (content information).

- Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color

The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.

- sYCC601 color

Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is larger than the traditional RGB color model.

• ALLM (Auto Low Latency Mode)

This unit automatically switches to low latency mode depending on playback contents when using a combination of television and game console compatible with the ALLM function.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

310

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

- Auto Lip Sync

This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and video.

Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.

- HDMI Pass Through

Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is connected to the HDMI output connector.

- HDMI Control

If you connect the unit and an HDMI Control function compatible TV or player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI Control function setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other.

- Power off link

This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.

• Audio output destination switching

From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or the AV amplifier.

• Volume adjustment

You can adjust this unit's volume in the TV volume adjustment operation.

- Input source switching

You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input switching.

When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the source for that player.

• ARC (Audio Return Channel)

This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit based on the HDMI Control function.

If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate audio cable connection is required.

In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback on this unit for the TV.

• eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)

The eARC function is an extension of the conventional ARC function. It utilizes dedicated eARC function control to play back television audio from this unit without passing through HDMI control. Furthermore, the eARC function can transmit multichannel linear PCM, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS:X and other audio formats not compatible with conventional ARC. Connecting to an eARC function-compatible television also enables enjoyment of higher-quality surround playback of the audio content played from your television.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

• VRR (Variable Refresh Rate):

VRR reduces or eliminates lag, stutter and frame tearing for more fluid and better detailed gameplay.

• QMS (Quick Media Switching):

QMS for movies and video eliminates the delay that can result in blank screens before content is displayed.

• QFT (Quick Frame Transport):

QFT reduces latency for smoother no-lag gaming, and real-time interactive virtual reality.

■ Supported audio formats

2-channel Linear PCM	2-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Multi-channel Linear PCM	7.1-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Bitstream	Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS:X / DTS-HD Master Audio / DTS-HD High Resolution Audio / DTS Express
DSD 2-channel –	5.1-channel, 2.8 MHz

■ Supported video signals

• 480i
• 480p
• 576i
- 576p
- 720p 60/50Hz
• 1080i 60/50Hz
• 1080p 60/50/24Hz
• 4K 120/100/60/50/30/25/24 Hz
• 8K 60/50/30/25/24 Hz

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

312

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

Copyright protection system

In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
- If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio are not output correctly. Read the owner's manual of your television or player for more information.

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

313

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Video conversion function

This unit automatically converts the input video signals as shown in the diagram before outputting them to the TV.

graph TD
    A["Video device"] -->|HDMI signal| B["Input (IN)"]
    B --> C["Output (MONITOR OUT)"]
    C --> D["HDMI signal"]
    D --> E["Component video signal"]
    E --> F["Component video connectors"]
    F --> G["Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector"]
    G --> H["Component video connectors"]
    H --> I["Component video connectors"]
    I --> J["Output (MONITOR OUT)"]
    J --> K["HDMI-compatible TV"]
    K --> L["Component video connectors"]
    L --> M["Component video connectors"]
    M --> N["Output (MONITOR OUT)"]
    N --> O["HDMI-incompatible TV"]
    O --> P["Component video connectors"]
    P --> Q["Component video connectors"]
    Q --> R["Output (MONITOR OUT)"]
    R --> S["HDMI-incompatible TV"]

• The MAIN ZONE Video Conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.
• When component video signals are used, only 480i and 576i signals are converted to HDMI signals.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

314

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

This unit can convert the input video signals to the resolution that is set for "Resolution" in the menu before outputting them to the TV. (128 p. 207)

Input signal\Output signal

HDMI

480i/576i

480p/576p

720p 1080i

1080p30/25/24Hz

1080p60/50Hz

4K30/25/24Hz

4K60/50Hz

4K120/100Hz

8K30/25/24Hz

8K60/50Hz

HDMI

480i/576i

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

480p/576p

√

√

√

√

√

√

720p

√

√

√

√

√

1080i

√

√

√

√

1080p 30/25/24Hz

√

√

√

1080p 60/50Hz

√

√

√

4K 30/25/24Hz

√

√

4K 60/50Hz

√*1

√

4K 120/100Hz

√*2

8K 30/25/24Hz

√*2

8K 60/50Hz

√*2

Component video

480i/576i

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

480p/576p

720p

1080i

1080p

Video

480i/576i

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

*1 The HDMI connector on the front panel supports YCbCr 4:2:0 format only.
*2 Only supported by the HDMI 7 connector.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

315

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a USB memory devices

• This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
• This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
• This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
• If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/Apple Lossless/DSD) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played back properly.

■ Compatible formats

	Sampling frequency Channel Bit rate		Extension
WMA*1	32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel	32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV	32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz	2-channel – .wav
MPEG-4 AAC*1	32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 - 320 kbps .aac/.m4a
FLAC	44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz	2-channel – .flac
Apple Lossless*2	44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz	2-channel – .m4a
DSD 2.8/5.6 MHz 2-channel – .dsf/.diff

*1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.

Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer's settings.

*2 The Apple Lossless Audio Codec (ALAC) decoder is distributed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

316

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

■ Maximum number of playable files and folder

The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by this unit are as follows.

Item\Media	USB memory device
Number of folder directory levels *1	8 levels
Number of folders 500
Number of files*2	5000

*1 The limited number includes the root folder.
*2 The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device capacity and the file size.

Playing back a Bluetooth device

This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile.

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile): When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality.
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile): When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.

■ About Bluetooth communications

Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference may cause malfunctions.

• Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable gases are generated
  • Near automatic doors and fire alarms

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

317

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS

• This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
• This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
• This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
• If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC/Apple Lossless/DSD) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played back properly.
• A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
  For playing mentioned audio formats via a network a server software, for example Twonky Media Server or jRiver Media Server, needs to be installed on your computer or NAS for full support. There are other server software available too. Please check supported formats.

■ Specifications of supported files

	Sampling frequency Channel Bit rate			Extension
WMA*1	32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel	32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV	32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz	2-channel – .wav
MPEG-4 AAC*1	32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 - 320 kbps .aac/.m4a
FLAC	44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz	2-channel – .flac
Apple Lossless*2	44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192 kHz	2-channel – .m4a
DSD 2.8/5.6 MHz 2-channel –	.dsf/.diff

*1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.

Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer's settings.

*2 The Apple Lossless Audio Codec (ALAC) decoder is distributed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

318

Remote

Index

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

Playing back Internet Radio

■ Playable broadcast station specifications

	Sampling frequency	Bit rate	Extension
WMA 32/44.1/48 kHz		48 – 192 kbps	.wma
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz		32 – 320 kbps	.mp3
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz		48 - 320 kbps	.aac/.m4a

Personal memory plus function

The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ ^® XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic Volume, Restorer and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.

- "Surround Parameter" settings are stored for each sound mode.

Last function memory

This function stores the settings which were made before going into the standby mode.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

319

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Explanation of terms

Audyssey

Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^®

Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics.

Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ ^® XT32 to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.

Audyssey Dynamic Volume®

Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ ^® is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.

Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment)

Audyssey LFC ^™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFC ^™ dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.

Audyssey MultEQ® XT32

Audyssey MultEQ ^® XT32 is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements, MultEQ ^® XT32 calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

320

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Auro-3D

Auro-3D®

The Auro-3D ^® technology suite is a groundbreaking new audio technology that combines height-based listening formats with powerful creative tools to deliver an unrivaled three-dimensional sound experience. Auro-3D ^® is the general format name for Sound in 3D and its related speaker lay-outs.

Auro-Matic®

Auro-Matic® up-mixing technology software is a unique creative tool that transforms legacy Mono, Stereo and Surround content into a natural 3D or 2D listening experience.

Dolby

Dolby Atmos

Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.

Dolby Atmos Stream

Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos Enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

321

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories.

A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels ("FL", "FR" and "C"), 2 surround channels ("SL" and "SR") and the "LFE" channel for low frequency effects.

Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround sound experience in the home.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback device.

Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby Surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.

Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers)

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. These speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing. These features can be built into a conventional speaker or standalone speaker module. The features minimally impact the overall speaker footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby Surround playback.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master.

This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

322

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Speaker Virtualizer

Dolby Atmos height virtualization is a digital signal processing solution that leverages Dolby's deep understanding of human audio perception to create the sensation of overhead sound from the listener-level speakers. This signal processing applies height-cue filters to overhead audio components contained within the audio signal before they are mixed into the listener-level speakers.

These filters simulate the natural spectral cues imparted by our ears to sounds that originate from overhead.

For stereo and 3.1-channel speaker configuration, Dolby Atmos height virtualization is combined with surround virtualization to create an enveloping 360-degree audio minus the speakers that would ordinarily be employed behind or to the side of the listener.

DTS

Dialog Control

Gives you control of the listening experience. You can lift the dialog out from the background sounds when clarity and intelligibility are desired. This requires that content has been authored to support Dialog Control.

DTS

This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic surround sound experience, and is found in the world's finest movie theaters and screening rooms.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS ^™ Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

323

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1

DTS-ES ^™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1

DTS-ESTM Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.

DTS Express

DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1-channels, 24 to 256 kbps).

DTS-HD

This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray Disc.

This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are supported in Blu-ray Disc.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS:X

DTS:X produces a hemisphere of audio, where flyovers as well as ambient backgrounds become truly enveloping. DTS:X objects enable audio to move smoothly from one speaker to any other creating life-like realism.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

324

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

DTS Neural:X

Enables an immersive audio experience for older content. DTS Neural:X can upmix your stereo, 5.1 or 7.1 content to take full advantage of all speakers in your surround sound system.

DTS Virtual:X

DTS Virtual:X allows you to enjoy multi-dimensional sound regardless of room size, layout, or speaker configuration.

IMAX®

IMAX ^® is well admired around the world for a premium large format movie experience. IMAX delivers the most advanced movie projection technology combined with rich, deep sound.

Audio

Apple Lossless Audio Codec

This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data compressed to approximately 60 – 70 % can be decompressed to exactly the same original data.

Bass Sync

Audio sources such as BD and DVD inherently have time delay between the bass components of the satellite channel and the LFE channel. This function adjusts such a delay for reproducing (replaying) richer bass sound during playback. This function is by default set to 0 msec. Since the delay varies according to the title, play back the audio source and adjust to the most effective value for playback. For some audio sources that are played back, this function may have little effect.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

325

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)

FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss in quality.

The FLAC license is as shown below.

Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Josh Coalson

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

LFE

This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system subwoofer(s).

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)

This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme, using the "MPEG-1" video compression standard. It compresses the data volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

326

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4

These are the names for digital compression format standards used for the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include "MPEG-1 Video", "MPEG-2 Video", "MPEG-4 Visual", "MPEG-4 AVC". Audio standards include "MPEG-1 Audio", "MPEG-2 Audio", "MPEG-4 AAC".

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation.

WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media® Player.

To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work properly.

Sampling frequency

Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in digitized format (producing a digital signal).

The number of readings taken in one second is called the “sampling frequency”. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the original.

Speaker impedance

This is an AC resistance value, indicated in (ohms).

Greater power can be obtained when this value is smaller.

Dialogue normalization function

This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources. It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources.

Dynamic range

The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.

Downmix

This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a lower number of channels and plays back according to the system's configuration.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

327

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Video

ISF

ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) is an organization that certifies video technicians who are then qualified to carry out calibration and adjustment to match the installation conditions. It also sets quality standards for the optimization of device video performance.

Progressive (sequential scanning)

This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides images with less flickering and jagged edges.

Network

AirPlay

AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.

WEP Key (network key)

This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for communications to be established between them.

Wi-Fi®

Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)

This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger security.

WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)

This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, compatible with more secure AES encryption.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

328

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)

This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and client.

Network Names (SSID: Service Set Identifier)

When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on “SSID (network names)”. For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication is unavailable unless both the “SSID” and the WEP key match. This is suitable for constructing a simplified network.

Others

HDCP

When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being copied without authorization.

MAIN ZONE

The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE.

Pairing

Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections occurring.

When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected.

Protection circuit

This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over temperature for any reason.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

329

Trademark information

Works with

Apple AirPlay

Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

The trademark "iPhone" is used in Japan with a license from Aiphone K.K.

Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

AUDYSSEY

MULTEQ XT32

DYNAMIC VOLUME

AUDYSSEY

LFC

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™ are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.

AURO

3D®

AUDIO

Manufactured under license from Auro Technologies.

Auro-3D ^® and the related symbols are registered trademarks of Auro Technologies. All materials contained in this work are protected by copyright law and may not be reproduced, distributed, transmitted, displayed, published or broadcast without the prior written permission of Auro Technologies NV or in case of third party materials, the owner of that content. You may not alter or remove any trademark, copyright or other notice from copies of the content.

Auro Technologies: mail [e-mail], phone [phone], fax [phone],

www.auro-technologies.com

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

330

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

DOLBY

ATMOS

COMPATIBLE

DOLBY

VISION

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Audio, Dolby Surround, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together, DTS:X, the DTS:X logo, Virtual:X, and the DTS Virtual:X logo are registered trademarks and/or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

HIGH DEFINITION MULTIMEDIA INTERFACE

The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

HDR10+ ^TM logo is a trademark of HDR10+ Technologies, LLC.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

331

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

IMAX®

ENHANCED

Manufactured under license from IMAX Corporation. IMAX® is a registered trademark of IMAX Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All Rights Reserved. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

CERTIFIED

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies interoperability among wireless LAN devices.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

332

Specifications

■ Audio section

- Power amplifier

Rated output: Front:

125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)

165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Center:

125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)

165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Surround:

125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)

165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Surround back / Height1 / Height2:

125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)

165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Dynamic power: 130 W x 2-channel (8 Ω/ohms)

190 W x 2-channel (4 Ω/ohms)

Output connectors: 4 – 16 Ω/ohms

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

Index

333

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

- Analog

Input sensitivity: 200 mV

Frequency response: 10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, -3 dB (Direct mode)

S/N: 102 dB (IHF-A weighted, Direct mode)

Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz – 20 kHz) (Direct mode)

Rated output: 1.2 V

- Digital

D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)

Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)

S/N ratio — 102 dB

Dynamic range — 100 dB

Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface

- Phono equalizer

Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV

RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

S/N: 74 dB (IHF-A)

Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)

Front panel D

y Rear panel Re

In

334

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

■ Video section

- Standard video connectors

Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz – 10 MHz — 0, -3 dB

• Color component video connector

Input/output level and impedance: Y signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

P_B/C_B signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

P_R/C_R signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz – 60 MHz — 0, -3 dB

■ Tuner section

[FM] [AM]

(Note: V at 75 /ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10^-15 W)

Reception frequency range: 87.5 MHz – 107.9 MHz 520 kHz – 1710 kHz

Effective sensitivity: 1.2 μV (12.8 dBf) 18 μV

50 dB sensitivity: MONO - 2.8 μV (20.2 dBf)

S/N ratio: MONO - 70 dB (IHF-A weighted, Direct mode)

STEREO - 67 dB (IHF-A weighted, Direct mode)

Distortion: MONO - 0.7 % (1 kHz)

STEREO - 1.0 % (1 kHz)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

335

Remote

Index

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

■ Wireless LAN section

Network type (wireless LAN standard): Conforming to IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n

(Wi-Fi® compliant) *1

Security: WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit

WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES)

WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)

Used frequency range: 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz

*1 The Wi-Fi® CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

336

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Bluetooth section

Communications system: Bluetooth Specification Version 4.2

Transmission power: Bluetooth Specification Power Class 1

Maximum communication range: Approx. 98.4 ft/30 m in line of sight *2

Used frequency range: 2.4 GHz

Modulation scheme: FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum)

Supported profiles: Receiver function

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2

AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.5

Transmitter function

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2

Corresponding codec: SBC

Transmission range (A2DP): 20 Hz – 20,000 Hz

*2 The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.

General

Operating temperature: 41 °F - 95 °F (5 °C - 35 °C)

Power supply: AC 120 V, 60 Hz

Power consumption: 710 W

Power consumption in standby mode: 0.1 W *

Power consumption in CEC standby mode: 0.5 W

* When "Network Control" in the menu is set to "Off In Standby" and "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "Off".

For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

337

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

■ Dimensions (Unit : in. (mm))

■ Weight: 30.2 lb (13.7 kg)

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

Index

Numerics

11.1-channel 59
3D 310
4K/8K 310
5.1-channel 37,46
7.1-channel 37,47
9.1-channel 51

A

AirPlay 128

All Zone Stereo 139

Audio formats 312, 316, 318, 319

Audio settings 177, 182

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® 320

Audyssey Dynamic Volume® 320

Audyssey LFC™ 320

Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 320

Audyssey settings 193, 221

Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ 220

Audyssey® Setup 219

Auto sound mode 144

Auto Standby 262

B

Bi-amp 65
Bluetooth device 98
Blu-ray Disc player 78, 92

C

Cable TV 77

D

Direct sound mode 149
Display 22
Dolby Atmos 321
Dolby sound mode 145, 322
DTS sound mode 146,323
DVD player 78,92

E

ECO Mode 259

External control device 87

F

Firmware Update 268
FM/AM antenna 83,106
Front panel 18

G

Game console 80
General settings 180, 259

H

HDCP 313
HDMI Control 156,202
HEOS Account 120,258
HEOS Favorites 133

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

339

Contents

Connections Playback Settings Tips

1

Input Assign 214

Input settings 178, 214

Input source 91

Internet Radio 113

L

Listening position 219

M

Menu map 177

Muting 92

N

NAS 115

Network settings 251

0

Original sound mode 148

P

Pairing 98,100

PC 115

PCM multi-channel sound mode 148

Picture Mode 198

Protection circuit 329

Pure direct 144

Q

Queue 94,116,123

Remote control unit 28

Resetting factory settings 307

Resetting network settings 308

Restorer 190

S

Satellite tuner 77

Set-top box 77

Setup Assistant 180

Sleep timer 159

Sound mode 142

Speaker connection 40

Speaker settings 178, 219

Spotify 131

Stereo sound mode 149

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

340

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips

T

Tips 284

Troubleshooting 286

TV 73,74,75

U

USB memory device 82,93

V

Video camcorder 80

Video Conversion 206, 314

Video Select 137

Video settings 177, 198

Volume 92,135

W

Web control 167

Wi-Fi settings 252

Wired LAN 85,251

Wireless LAN 86,252

Z

ZONE2/ZONE3 67,169

Front panel D

Rear panel Re

Index

341

DENON®

www.denon.com

3520 10742 00ADA

©2020 Sound United. All Rights Reserved.